In the Kitch

menu icon
go to homepage
  • Patriotic Recipes
  • Recipe Index
  • Guides
  • Tutorials
  • Subscribe
    • Facebook
    • Pinterest
    • YouTube
  • search icon
    Homepage link
    • Patriotic Recipes
    • Recipe Index
    • Guides
    • Tutorials
    • Subscribe
    • Facebook
    • Pinterest
    • YouTube
  • ×
    In the Kitch » Recipes

    Kimchi Rice Bowl

    March 9, 2022 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    Liven up your palate with spicy kimchi, pickled vegetables and Asian seasonings over a bowl of fluffy white rice in this kimchi rice bowl. Marinated chicken adds protein to this bowl packed with vitamins and minerals.

    Kimchi rice bowl on wooden background.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    ❤️ Your New Favorite Make-Ahead Bowl

    • This is a great make-ahead meal prep dish. With four full servings, you can prepare lunches ahead of time and enjoy them throughout the week or enjoy a family dinner together.
    • The flavor and texture combination is delish. Kimchi and rice make a great combination for their texture and flavor contrast. Kimchi and chicken are also a common pairing.
    • Versatile. Both rice and kimchi are versatile ingredients that can be combined with various ingredients. If you don't like one or two of the ingredients on the list, swap them out for something you love and happen to have on hand.
    • Filling. Rice makes the dish more filling, providing an extra boost of energy.

    For more dishes like this, you can try my kimchi bacon fried rice and marinated kimchi chicken or check out more kimchi recipes.

    🍚 Ingredients

    Kimchi rice bowl ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • fresh ginger - Instead of fresh ginger, you can substitute with ground ginger. For each tablespoon of fresh ginger, you can use ¼ teaspoon ground ginger.
    • chicken breasts - Boneless and skinless.
    • daikon radish - Daikon radish is a long white radish, popular in Asian cooking, and it's commonly an ingredient in kimchi. It's a tad peppery but much less than the more common red radishes. The daikon and carrots will be pickled, but you could also pick up a jar of pickled Asian vegetables if you don't feel like pickling your own.
    • cooked rice - This is a great way to use up leftover rice. But if you have to make more: 1 cup dry uncooked rice = about 3 cups cooked.
    • kimchi - Check out how to make kimchi here. You can also pick a jar up from the grocery store or online.
    • cucumber - Thinly sliced cucumbers balance the hot ingredients with a light, cooling sensation. I have tips for slicing them thinly below. Asian cucumbers are great for slicing and pickling but you can also use English cucumbers.
    • wakame - Never tried wakame before? Visit a global food store to pick up this edible seaweed that offers a salty, savory flavor. It will need to be rehydrated. If you can't find any or just don't like wakame, leave it out.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    🥘 How to Make a Kimchi Rice Bowl

    Chicken breasts marinating in ziptop bag.

    Step 1. Marinate the chicken. Whisk the soy sauce, honey, sesame oil and ginger together. Transfer the marinade to a zip-top bag, add the chicken breasts and marinate for 30 minutes.

    Brine in jar on tiled background.

    Step 2. Make a brine. In a quart-size mason jar, add the vinegar, sugar and salt. Pour the boiling water into the jar and stir until dissolved. This will be the pickling brine.

    Vegetables pickling in jar.

    Step 3. Pickle the veggies. Stuff the julienned carrots and daikon into the jar, then let them hang out and cool for 20 minutes so they can soak up all of that tangy brine.

    Chicken breasts in frying pan.

    Step 4. Fry the chicken. Heat the canola oil in a frying pan. Remove the chicken breasts from the marinade, letting the excess drip off and fry them in the pan. The internal temperature needs to reach 165°F.

    Chicken breasts sliced on cutting board.

    Step 5. Slice the chicken. Remove the chicken to a cutting board and slice it into even slices.

    Kimchi chicken rice bowl with veggies in white bowl.

    Step 6. Assemble the kimchi chicken rice bowls. Divide the rice, chicken breast, kimchi, pickled veggies, sliced cucumbers and wakame evenly among 4 bowls. Garnish and serve!

    🔪 How to Get Thin Cucumber Slices

    Here is a pro tip: When you're slicing cucumbers thinly, a knife won't always cut it. Use a vegetable peeler or mandolin slicer to create thin, papery slices that are almost transparent.

    Thinly sliced cucumbers on cutting board.

    While thick slices are hard and chunky, thin slices are light and refreshing and can be rolled up like ribbon, adding an aesthetic touch to the bowl.

    ❓ Kimchi Rice Bowl FAQs

    What is a kimchi rice bowl?

    A kimchi rice bowl is a combination of components that come together in a bowl including a base of rice, a protein, veggies, kimchi and a sauce. There is always rice and kimchi, but you can pick and choose the other ingredients you would like to fill the bowl with.

    How long do leftovers last?

    Store leftovers in a closed container in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 days.

    How do you reheat the leftovers?

    You can reheat this dish in the microwave (with a wet paper towel on top), in the oven at 350°F (covered in foil in an oven-safe dish) or in a pot on the stove over medium heat. You might need to add a splash of broth or water to remoisten it.

    Kimchi rice bowl with kimchi, vegetables and sesame seeds on the side.

    ❤️ More Flavorful Kimchi Recipes

    • Kimchi shrimp stir fry in bowl on wooden background.
      Kimchi Shrimp Stir Fry
    • Kimchi beef stew in Asian bowl.
      Easy Kimchi Beef Stew
    • Kimchi udon in a bowl with chop sticks.
      Kimchi Udon Stir Fry
    • Kimchi cod tacos in serving dish.
      Kimchi Tacos

    If you tried this Kimchi Rice Bowl Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Kimchi rice bowl with chicken breast.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Kimchi Rice Bowl

    Liven up your palate with spicy kimchi, pickled vegetables, marinated chicken breast and Asian seasonings over a bowl of fluffy white rice in this kimchi rice bowl.
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine Japanese, Korean
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 10 minutes minutes
    Marinating Time 30 minutes minutes
    Total Time 55 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 406kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Large skillet
    • 1 Quart jar
    • 1 Large zip-top bag

    Ingredients

    For the Chicken Marinade

    • ½ cup soy sauce
    • ¼ cup honey
    • 2 teaspoons sesame oil
    • 2 tablespoons fresh ginger grated
    • 4 boneless skinless chicken breasts

    For the Pickled Veggies

    • ½ cup white vinegar
    • ¼ cup sugar
    • 1 teaspoon salt
    • 1 cup boiling water
    • 1 cup carrots julienned
    • 1 cup Daikon radish julienned

    For the Kimchi Bowl

    • 1 tablespoon canola oil
    • 3 cups cooked rice 1 cup dry uncooked rice = about 3 cups cooked
    • 2 cups kimchi chopped
    • 1 cucumber thinly sliced lengthwise
    • 1 cup wakame rehydrated (optional)

    Optional Garnishes

    • sesame seeds
    • fresh cilantro chopped
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    For the Marinated Chicken

    • Whisk the soy sauce, honey, sesame oil and ginger together in a small bowl. Transfer the marinade to a zip-top bag.
      ½ cup soy sauce, ¼ cup honey, 2 teaspoons sesame oil, 2 tablespoons fresh ginger
    • Add the chicken breasts and marinate for 30 minutes.
      4 boneless skinless chicken breasts

    For the Pickled Veggies

    • In a quart-size mason jar, add the vinegar, sugar and salt.
      ½ cup white vinegar, ¼ cup sugar, 1 teaspoon salt
    • Pour the boiling water into the jar and stir until the sugar and salt are dissolved.
      1 cup boiling water
    • Stuff the julienned carrots and daikon into the jar.
      1 cup carrots, 1 cup Daikon radish
    • Allow to cool/marinate at room temperature for at least 20 minutes.

    For the Kimchi Bowl

    • In a large skillet over medium heat, heat the canola oil.
      1 tablespoon canola oil
    • Remove the chicken breasts from the marinade and add them to the frying pan. Cook until the internal temperature reaches 165°F (about 5 to 7 minutes per side). Remove and slice the chicken.
    • Divide the rice (about ¾ cup each), chicken breast, kimchi, pickled veggies, sliced cucumbers and wakame evenly among 4 bowls.
      2 cups kimchi, 1 cucumber, 1 cup wakame
    • Garnish with sesame seeds and fresh cilantro. Serve!

    Video

    Notes

    • Nutrition information does not include the optional garnishes.
    • When you're slicing cucumbers thinly, a knife won't always cut it. Use a vegetable peeler or mandolin slicer to create thin, papery slices that are almost transparent. While thick slices are hard and chunky, thin slices are light and refreshing and can be rolled up like ribbon, adding an aesthetic touch to the bowl.
    • Instead of fresh ginger, you can substitute with ½ teaspoon ground ginger.
    • Store leftovers in a closed container in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 days.
    • You can reheat this dish in the microwave (with a wet paper towel on top), in the oven at 350°F (covered in foil in an oven-safe dish) or in a pot on the stove over medium heat. You might need to add a splash of broth or water to remoisten it.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 406kcal | Carbohydrates: 52g | Protein: 29g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 72mg | Sodium: 1112mg | Potassium: 764mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 5438IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 52mg | Iron: 1mg

    Cherry Galette

    March 2, 2022 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    Bite into a flaky pastry and delightfully sweet fruit filling with this cherry galette recipe. Serve this dish warm with a scoop of ice cream, or chill it in the fridge for a cool dessert.

    Cherry galette with icing sugar on white plate. A small bowl of cherries and icing sugar on the side.

    Sweet cherries make a rich addition to the modern French galette. Cherry is my favorite type of fruit galette but I also make them in different sweet and savory flavors: blackberry galette, pumpkin galette and potato vegetable galette.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Cherry Galette Ingredients

    Cherry galette ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • sweet cherries (Bing) - Can use fresh or frozen in this recipe, just as long as they are pitted. Read some more notes on cherries below.
    • flour - All purpose flour is great.
    • sugar - I use 4 sugars: white granulated sugar for the pastry, brown sugar for the filling, turbinado sugar to sprinkle on top of the pastry and powdered sugar to sprinkle on top of the filling for serving.
    • butter - Make sure it's nice and cold.
    • egg - For the egg wash which makes the pastry edges look nice and glossy.
    • salt (not pictured) -
    • cold water - To make the pastry dough.
    • cornstarch - To prevent the filling from being too watery and the pastry to become soggy.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    🍒This recipe uses sweet Bing cherries, which are the most famous sweet cherries in the United States. Bing cherries are the classic heart-shaped cherry with dark red skin and sweet flesh.

    While some desserts use tart cherries, this recipe uses Bing cherries because they're sweet, juicy, have a beautiful dark color when baked and taste great inside a galette pastry.

    Cherries are best when they're in season. Pick some up at your local farmers' market to support the community while you bake a delicious dessert or are looking for a healthy snack. If you don't have a farmers' market nearby, you'll find them at the grocery store.

    💬I also have a raspberry fruit galette recipe if you're interested.

    How to Make it

    Pastry ingredients in bowl.

    Step 1. Preheat the oven to 400ºF. Combine flour, sugar and salt in a medium bowl.

    Pastry dough in bowl.

    Step 2. Add the cold butter and work it with your fingers or a fork into the flour, until it is grainy.

    Pastry dough kneaded by woman's hands in bowl.

    Step 3. Add the water and combine with your hands until you get a soft, smooth dough.

    Pastry dough on baking sheet.

    Step 4. Transfer to a sheet of parchment paper and roll it into a large circle, about 12"-14" in diameter (⅛" thickness is ideal). Place the dough circle with the parchment on a rimmed baking sheet.

    Chef's Note: I like to use a pizza pan because it's circular, just like the galette.

    Pastry dough with cherries and brown sugar on top.

    Step 5. In a medium bowl, toss the cherries with the brown sugar and cornstarch. Place them in the middle of the pastry, leaving a 2-inch to 3-inch border all around the outer edge.

    Pastry dough folded over cherry mixture.

    Step 6. Fold the pastry edges over the cherries, leaving the center open. (For the egg wash - optional): Beat the egg with the water in a small bowl. Brush the pastry with the egg mixture. Sprinkle the pastry with some turbinado sugar.

    Cherry galette on sheet pan.

    Step 7. Bake for about 30 to 35 minutes in the preheated oven, or until the pastry is golden and the fruit is hot and bubbly. Let cool for 10 to 15 minutes.

    Cherry galette on sheet pan with parchment.

    Step 8. Sprinkle the cherry galette with powdered sugar. Slice and serve!

    Cherry galette with icing sugar sprinkled on top, on white plate. Dark red background.

    Chef's Note: You can also check out my video in the recipe card to watch how it's made.

    Top Tip

    Make sure the butter and water is as cold as possible. It will result in a flaky, tender crust.

    Serving Suggestions

    If you serve your fruit galette warm, adding a scoop of vanilla bean ice cream is a popular way to elevate this dessert. The ice cream melts into the pastry, adding cool creaminess to the warm, sweet-tart fruit.

    You could also add herbs or floral garnishes for an Instagram-ready touch.

    Storage Information

    • Cherries can last up to ten days in the fridge. If you freeze cherries, they can last up to a year. Check out my easy tutorial for how to freeze cherries.
    • The baked cherry galette can also be frozen for up to 3 months, but be sure to cool it first.

    Recipe FAQs

    When are cherries in season?

    Cherry season can range anywhere from May to early September, depending on where you live and what type of cherry you are looking for.

    How many cherries are in a cup?

    There are approximately 21 standard-size sweet cherries in a 1 cup serving.

    How can you tell if cherries have gone bad?

    You can tell cherries have gone bad if you see mold growth, bruising or if they are mushy. If you see any of these signs, it is time to discard them.

    Cherry galette with icing sugar on white plate.

    More Delicious Berry Desserts to Try

    • Strawberry ice cream sundae with chocolate shavings in curved bowl.
      Strawberry Ice Cream Sundae
    • Canada Day raspberry cheesecake in jars with red and white spoons.
      Raspberry Cheesecake in a Jar (Canada Day Dessert)
    • Strawberry parfait in stemmed glasses.
      Strawberry Parfait
    • Raspberry Coulis Crème Brûlée in a ramekin.
      Raspberry Crème Brûlée

    If you tried this 🍒 Cherry Galette Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Cherry galette dusted with icing sugar.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Cherry Galette Recipe

    Bite into a flaky pastry and delightfully sweet fruit filling with this cherry galette. There is no chill time for the dough in this recipe and you can use fresh or frozen cherries!
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine French
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 30 minutes minutes
    Total Time 45 minutes minutes
    Servings 8
    Calories 265kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Parchment paper
    • Rimmed pizza pan

    Ingredients

    For the Pastry

    • 1 ¼ cups all-purpose flour
    • ¼ cup sugar
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • ½ cup cold butter cut into cubes
    • 3 tablespoons cold water

    For the Filling

    • 2 cups fresh sweet cherries (bing) pitted
    • ⅓ cup brown sugar
    • 1 tablespoon cornstarch

    Egg Wash (Optional)

    • 1 egg
    • 1 tablespoon water
    • turbinado sugar

    To Serve

    • powdered sugar
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 400ºF. Combine flour, sugar and salt in a medium bowl.
      1 ¼ cups all-purpose flour, ¼ cup sugar, ¼ teaspoon salt
      Pastry ingredients in bowl.
    • Add the cold butter and work it with your fingers or a fork into the flour, until it is grainy.
      ½ cup cold butter
      Pastry dough in bowl.
    • Add the water and combine with your hands until you get a soft, smooth dough.
      3 tablespoons cold water
      Pastry dough kneaded by woman's hands in bowl.
    • Transfer to a sheet of parchment paper and roll it into a large circle, about 12"-14" in diameter (⅛" thickness is ideal). Place the dough circle with the parchment on a rimmed baking sheet (I like to use a pizza pan).
      Pastry dough on baking sheet.
    • In a medium bowl, toss the cherries with the brown sugar and cornstarch. Place them in the middle of the pastry, leaving a 2-inch to 3-inch border all around the outer edge.
      2 cups fresh sweet cherries (bing), ⅓ cup brown sugar, 1 tablespoon cornstarch
      Pastry dough with cherries and brown sugar on top.
    • Fold the pastry edges over the cherries, leaving the center open.
      Pastry dough folded over cherry mixture.
    • (For the egg wash - optional) Beat the egg with the water in a small bowl. Brush the pastry with the egg mixture. Sprinkle the pastry with some turbinado sugar.
      1 egg, 1 tablespoon water
    • Bake for about 30 to 35 minutes in the preheated oven, or until the pastry is golden and the fruit is hot and bubbly. Let cool for 10 to 15 minutes.
      Cherry galette on sheet pan.
    • Sprinkle with powdered sugar. Slice and serve.
      Cherry galette on sheet pan with parchment.

    Video

    Notes

    • You can use frozen cherries for this recipe and you do not need to thaw them.
    • Make sure the butter and water is as cold as possible. It will result in a flaky, tender crust.
    • If you serve your fruit galette warm, adding a scoop of vanilla bean ice cream is a popular way to elevate this dessert.
    • Cherries can last up to ten days in the fridge. If you freeze them, cherries can last up to a year.
    • The baked galette can also be frozen for up to 3 months, but be sure to cool it first.
    • You can tell cherries have gone bad if you see mold growth, bruising or if they are mushy. If you see any of these signs, it is time to discard them.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 265kcal | Carbohydrates: 37g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 51mg | Sodium: 175mg | Potassium: 121mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 20g | Vitamin A: 406IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 22mg | Iron: 1mg

    Homemade Sawmill Sausage Gravy

    February 23, 2022 by Joss Dyckson 2 Comments

    This creamy, homemade sawmill sausage gravy made with pork sausage drippings also utilizes the crumbled sausage for a chunky, gravy experience that you'll want to smother all over your biscuits. It's almost like a Southern-style sloppy Joe! It takes only 15 minutes to prepare and requires a few basic ingredients.

    Sawmill gravy with fresh herbs in a white bowl over a wooden plate.

    Sawmill gravy has a rich, savory, and comforting flavor. Milk gives it a creamy and smooth texture and the sausage adds meatiness, making the gravy flavorful and hearty.

    It will give you a whole new gravy experience in terms of taste and texture. I also make this old fashioned tomato gravy and easy brown gravy recipe if you like the classics.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What is Sawmill Gravy?

    Sawmill gravy is a white, Southern gravy made with flour, milk and sausage or bacon drippings. The flour and drippings make up the roux base; the dairy makes for a creamy gravy. The cooked meat is added right into the sauce, making it chunky rather than smooth.

    Sawmill Gravy Ingredients

    Sawmill gravy ingredients labeled.
    • seasoned pork sausage - In this easy recipe, I use seasoned pork sausage for the meat component. You can buy loose seasoned pork meat or simply remove the casings from pork sausages.
    • AP flour - To thicken the gravy.
    • milk - I use whole milk for full flavor.
    • fresh herbs - Such as rosemary, dill, thyme etc.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make it

    1. In a skillet over medium heat, cook the ground sausage until browned evenly and cooked through, crumbling it as it cooks.
    2. Remove the ground sausage from the skillet with a slotted spoon and reserve. You need to have 4 tablespoons of grease in the pan.
    3. Stir in the flour. Cook, stirring constantly, until the flour starts to turn golden and smells nutty (a couple of minutes).
    4. Gradually add the milk, whisking constantly to get all of the lumps out. Add the fresh herbs. Bring to a simmer.
    5. Simmer over medium-low heat until the mixture thickens, about 1 to 2 minutes. Season with salt and pepper.
    6. Stir in the cooked ground sausage and heat through.
    7. Serve the homemade sawmill sausage gravy.

    🤤 Hungry for more gravy recipes? Try my homemade ham gravy.

    Joss' Tips

    • Loose sausage vs. links. Opt for bulk sausage (not sausage links or patties), as I find that it crumbles better when cooked.
    • Top up the grease. If there isn't enough grease from cooking the sausage meat, top it up with butter or canola oil to equal the amount needed in the recipe. If using butter, melt it in the pan with the drippings.
    • Add milk gradually. Make sure to slowly pour in the milk while stirring constantly to help prevent lumps. Start with a little milk, stir until it's incorporated, then add more gradually.
    • Serve immediately. This sausage gravy is best served hot over freshly baked biscuits. You can also serve it over toast, fried potatoes, or even with fried chicken.
    Sawmill gravy with fresh herbs on the side.

    Recipe FAQs

    Why is it called sawmill gravy?

    It is called sawmill gravy because it has its origins in the Southern region of the US where lumber was one of the main industries. It was cheap and filling for the lumber workers and it enhanced the taste and texture of biscuits. It is said that the original recipe was made with cornmeal instead of flour, hence the nickname 'sawmill gravy' (which I imagine wouldn't have had the best texture).

    What's the difference between country gravy and sausage gravy?

    The main difference you will notice is that country gravy lacks the sausage, so it is smooth rather than chunky. The fats can also differ: country gravy usually uses butter whereas sawmill gravy uses sausage drippings.

    How do you store the leftovers?

    If there are leftovers, store them in a covered container in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 days.

    How do you reheat sawmill gravy?

    Reheat over medium heat in a saucepan on the stove or in a microwaveable dish in the microwave. You can whisk in more milk to thin it out, if needed.

    What do you serve it with?

    Serving this gravy over split biscuits is the best way to use it up for a true Southern delight! I also enjoy it over mashed potatoes.

    Sawmill gravy in a white bowl and a gravy spoon on the side.

    More Delicious Homemade Sauces to Try

    • Bison chanterelle mushroom meat sauce in jar.
      Bison and Chanterelle Meat Sauce
    • Xo sauce in a jar.
      Easy XO Sauce Recipe
    • Jerk sauce in food processor.
      How to Make Jerk Sauce
    • Mole sauce in a bowl with cilantro and black sesame seeds.
      How to Make Mole Sauce

    What did you serve this chunky, meaty, homemade gravy over? If you tried this Homemade Sawmill Sausage Gravy Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Sawmill gravy in white bowl.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Homemade Sawmill Sausage Gravy

    This creamy, homemade sawmill sausage gravy made with pork sausage drippings also utilizes the crumbled sausage for a chunky, gravy experience.
    Course Sauce
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 15 minutes minutes
    Servings 6
    Calories 315kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    • 1 pound ground pork sausage meat or pork sausages with casings removed
    • 1-2 tablespoons butter to add to the sausage drippings
    • ¼ cup all-purpose flour
    • 2 cups milk
    • 2 tablespoons fresh herbs diced
    • salt and pepper to taste
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • In a skillet over medium heat, cook the ground sausage until browned evenly and cooked through, crumbling it as it cooks.
      1 pound ground pork sausage meat
    • Remove the ground sausage from the skillet with a slotted spoon and reserve. You need to have 4 tablespoons of grease in the pan. (If there isn't enough grease from cooking the sausage meat, top it up with butter or canola oil to equal 4 tablespoons. If using butter, melt it in the pan with the drippings.)
    • Stir in the flour. Cook, stirring constantly, until the flour starts to turn golden and smells nutty (a couple of minutes).
      ¼ cup all-purpose flour
    • Gradually add the milk, whisking constantly to get all of the lumps out. Add the fresh herbs. Bring to a simmer.
      2 cups milk, 2 tablespoons fresh herbs
    • Simmer over medium-low heat until the mixture thickens, about 1 to 2 minutes. Season with salt and pepper.
    • Stir in the cooked ground sausage and heat through. Serve.

    Notes

    • The fresh herbs can be a mixture of thyme, rosemary, sage, oregano, parsley, etc.
    • For a thinner gravy, whisk in some more milk until desired consistency.
    • Sawmill gravy is typically served over biscuits. You can also serve it over toast, fried potatoes, or even with fried chicken.
    • Opt for bulk sausage (not sausage links or patties), as I find that it crumbles better when cooked.
    • If there are leftovers, store them in a covered container in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 days.
    • Reheat over medium heat on the stove or in the microwave. You can whisk in more milk to thin it out.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 315kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 15g | Fat: 25g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 68mg | Sodium: 533mg | Potassium: 303mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 282IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 101mg | Iron: 1mg

    Kimchi Deviled Eggs

    February 16, 2022 by Joss Dyckson 8 Comments

    Add a spicy twist to a classic party food by making this recipe for kimchi deviled eggs. The crunchy pickled veggies pair perfectly with the creamy egg yolk filling and the tangy flavors of Korean kimchi.

    Deviled eggs with kimchi, pickled veggies and cilantro on parchment.

    This kimchi recipe is quick to prepare and is perfect for potlucks, dinner parties, picnics or at-home snacking. It makes 12 deviled eggs but can easily be scaled up to make more eggs for larger gatherings. They would also be a nice addition to Korean-Themed Meals.

    This fusion dish combines the creamy texture of traditional deviled eggs with the spicy, umami flavor of kimchi, the end result being a unique and flavorful appetizer.

    These Korean kimchi dumplings and kimchi cheese spread are also unique fusion appetizers that I think you'll enjoy. You can also check out more of my kimchi recipes.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Kimchi Deviled Egg Ingredients

    Kimchi deviled egg ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • large eggs - Hard-boiled.
    • for the pickled veggies - Apple cider vinegar, white sugar, carrots and red radishes.
    • mayonnaise - You can also substitute with Miracle Whip if you prefer, but keep in mind it is more sweet and tangy than mayo.
    • kimchi - Using different types and ages of kimchi will slightly alter the resulting flavor profile of the deviled eggs, so feel free to experiment with a few different kinds. Fresher kimchi will be crunchier and lend a milder taste to the filling while using an older jar of kimchi will give a stronger tangy and fermented taste to the resulting kimchi deviled eggs. Either way, the combination of kimchi and eggs is a match made in heaven!
    • green onions - Gives a nice bite of flavor and texture to the egg mixture.
    • sesame oil - Toasted.
    • black sesame seeds and fresh cilantro - To garnish.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Chef's Note: The pickled veggies add the perfect touch of sweetness and tang to the savory filling so don't skip this step!

    Add Ins

    If you can find it and are a fan of spice, adding a tablespoon of gochujang paste to the filling will add another depth of flavor to your kimchi deviled eggs.

    This red chili paste is a staple ingredient in Korean cuisine and can usually be found in Asian specialty food stores, the international section of many supermarkets.

    How to Make Them

    Pickle the Veggies

    Julienned veggies in jar with pickling brine.

    Step 1. In a small bowl or jar, add the vinegar, water and sugar. Stir until the sugar dissolves. Add the julienned carrots and radishes and let sit for 20 to 30 minutes. In the meantime, you can hard-boil the eggs.

    Cooked egg yolk in a spoon over bowl.

    Step 2. Carefully remove the egg yolks from the sliced, hard-boiled eggs, making sure to keep the cooked egg white intact. Transfer the egg yolks to a medium bowl and mash them completely with a fork.

    Make the Egg Mixture

    Deviled egg mixture in bowl.

    Step 3. Add the mayo, kimchi, green onions and sesame oil. Mix until smooth. Season with salt, to taste.

    Deviled egg mixture in cooked egg white.

    Step 4. Use a small spoon or pastry bag to transfer the egg yolk mixture into the empty egg white halves. The filling should come a little above the top of the egg.

    Kimchi deviled eggs and scissors cutting cilantro.

    Step 5. Top the deviled eggs with the pickled veggies, black sesame seeds and fresh cilantro. Serve!

    Deviled egg with kimchi and pickled veggies held by cooking tweezers.

    Joss' Tips

    To hard boil the eggs:

    1. Place them in a pot and cover with water by 1".
    2. Bring to a boil, cover with a lid and turn the heat off. Let them sit there and cook for 15 minutes.
    3. Drain the eggs and run cool water over them. Peel the eggs and then slice them in half lengthwise.

    Using a pastry bag to pipe your filling into the eggs will ensure the cleanest and most appealing presentation. However, if you do not have a pastry bag available, simply filling a plastic sandwich bag and carefully cutting off the corner to make a small hole will also suffice.

    Storage Info

    • Be sure to refrigerate your kimchi deviled eggs and consume them within a couple of days, while the pickled veggies are still crisp and fresh, or to a maximum of 4 days.
    • Store them in a sealed container to maintain freshness for as long as possible.
    Kimchi deviled eggs on a plate with kimchi in a small bowl in the background.

    More Kimchi Recipes to Try

    • Kimchi rice bowl with chicken breast.
      Kimchi Rice Bowl
    • Kimchi omelette on plate with fork.
      Kimchi Omelette
    • Kimchi grilled cheese sandwiches stacked on serving tray with skewer.
      Kimchi Grilled Cheese Sandwiches
    • Sliced kimchi pizza on round serving board.
      Kimchi Pizza

    If you tried this fusion 🥚 Kimchi Deviled Eggs Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Deviled eggs with kimchi, pickled veggies and cilantro on parchment.
    Print Pin
    5 from 5 votes

    Kimchi Deviled Eggs

    Crunchy pickled veggies pair perfectly with the creamy egg yolk filling and the tangy flavors of Korean kimchi in these kimchi deviled eggs. They're perfect for parties, picnics and barbecues!
    Course Appetizer, Side Dish
    Cuisine American, Italian, Korean, Spanish
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes minutes
    Total Time 30 minutes minutes
    Servings 12 deviled eggs
    Calories 74kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    For the Pickled Veggies

    • ½ cup apple cider vinegar
    • ¼ cup water
    • ¼ cup white sugar
    • ¼ cup carrots julienned
    • ¼ cup radishes julienned

    For the Eggs

    • 6 large eggs hard-boiled
    • 3 tablespoons mayonnaise
    • ¼ cup kimchi finely chopped
    • 2 tablespoons green onions finely chopped
    • 1 tablespoon sesame oil
    • salt to taste
    • black sesame seeds to garnish
    • fresh cilantro leaves chopped (to garnish)
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    For the Pickled Veggies

    • In a small bowl or jar, add the vinegar, water and sugar. Stir until the sugar dissolves.
      ½ cup apple cider vinegar, ¼ cup water, ¼ cup white sugar
    • Add the julienned carrots and radishes and let sit for 20 to 30 minutes. In the meantime, you can hard-boil the eggs.
      ¼ cup carrots, ¼ cup radishes
      Julienned veggies in jar with pickling brine.

    For the Eggs

    • To hard boil the eggs, place them in a pot and cover with water by 1". Bring to a boil, cover with a lid and turn the heat off. Let them sit there and cook for 15 minutes.
      6 large eggs
    • Drain the eggs and run cool water over them. Peel the eggs and then slice them in half lengthwise.
    • Carefully remove the egg yolks from the sliced eggs, making sure to keep the cooked egg white intact. Transfer the egg yolks to a medium bowl and mash them completely with a fork.
      Cooked egg yolk in a spoon over bowl.
    • Add the mayo, kimchi, green onions and sesame oil. Mix until smooth. Season with salt, to taste.
      3 tablespoons mayonnaise, ¼ cup kimchi, 2 tablespoons green onions, 1 tablespoon sesame oil
      Deviled egg mixture in bowl.
    • Use a small spoon or pastry bag to transfer the egg yolk mixture into the empty egg white halves. The filling should come a little above the top of the egg.
      Deviled egg mixture in cooked egg white.
    • Top the deviled eggs with the pickled veggies, black sesame seeds and fresh cilantro. Serve!
      Deviled eggs and scissors cutting cilantro.

    Notes

    • See tips for hard boiling eggs in the post.
    • Using a pastry bag to pipe your filling into the eggs will ensure the cleanest and most appealing presentation. However, if you do not have a pastry bag available, simply filling a plastic sandwich bag and carefully cutting off the corner to make a small hole will also suffice.
    • Be sure to refrigerate your kimchi deviled eggs and consume them within 2 to 4 days, while the pickled veggies are still crisp and fresh. Store them in a sealed container to maintain freshness for as long as possible.
    • If you can find it and are a fan of spice, adding a tablespoon of gochujang paste to the filling will add another depth of flavor to your kimchi deviled eggs.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 74kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 94mg | Sodium: 61mg | Potassium: 53mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 593IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 17mg | Iron: 1mg

    White Gravy

    February 9, 2022 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    This homemade, white gravy recipe is a great addition to your meal at a moment's notice, and not only for typical Southern cuisine. With only three simple ingredients, one of them being bacon (always a plus), it is an easy recipe to mix together and cook in less than twenty minutes.

    White gravy in a jar with bacon and asparagus in the background.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What is White Gravy?

    Like a sawmill gravy, it is creamy and starts with a roux base of bacon or sausage drippings and flour. This is then combined with milk. The end result is a smooth and thick white gravy (also called country gravy).

    Ingredients

    • raw bacon
    • AP flour
    • milk
    • salt and white pepper

    The white pepper is used to match the color of the dish and for its more subtle flavor, but feel free to use black pepper instead.

    How to Make it

    1. Cook bacon. Lay the bacon strips in a large, deep skillet. Heat over medium heat. Cook for about 5 minutes per side, until crispy.
    2. Combine grease and flour. Remove the bacon strips to a plate lined with paper towel. Transfer 2 ½ tablespoons of the bacon grease to a small saucepan and heat over medium heat. Slowly mix the flour into the bacon grease. Cook until it just starts to smell nutty, stirring constantly (about 2 minutes).
    3. Whisk. Slowly add the milk while whisking, until there are no lumps. Continue to cook, whisking often, until thickened (1-2 minutes). If the gravy is too thick for your liking, whisk in a little more milk until desired consistency.
    4. Serve. Season with salt and white pepper, to taste. Serve!

    This is a thick gravy, but if you'd like it to be thinner, simply whisk in some more milk until it reaches your desired consistency. If you aren't going to eat the bacon right away, it can be reserved in the fridge for another meal.

    White gravy in a jar, drizzling over cooked asparagus.

    Serving Suggestions

    White gravy is best served with biscuits and sausage for breakfast. You can also serve it in less conventional ways. You can pour it over steamed vegetables, mashed potatoes, grilled pierogies (one of my favorite ways), electric skillet pork chops, chicken-fried beef, country chicken, rice, fries, etc.

    One of the most popular dishes in Canada is poutine: a dish of fries covered with gravy and topped with cheese curds. It is normally covered in brown gravy, but using white gravy would make for a unique and tasty poutine.

    Storage

    This white gravy is best used up within 2 days, but can be refrigerated for up to 4 days. For long-term storage, you can put it in airtight containers and freeze it. That way it can last up to four to six months.

    The fried bacon can be refrigerated for up to 5 days.

    White gravy in a jar with bacon and asparagus in the background.

    What dish will you cover with your white gravy? Let me know in the comments!

    Hungry for more? Try our Dessert Gravy

    📋Recipe

    White gravy in a jar with bacon and asparagus on the side--top view.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    White Gravy Recipe

    This homemade, white gravy recipe is a great addition to your meal at a moment's notice.
    Course Sauce
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 13 minutes minutes
    Total Time 18 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 133kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    • 6 strips raw bacon
    • 2 ½ tablespoons AP flour
    • 1 cup milk
    • salt to taste
    • white pepper to taste
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Lay the bacon strips in a large, deep skillet. Heat over medium heat.
      6 strips raw bacon
    • Cook for about 5 minutes per side, until crispy.
    • Remove the bacon strips to a plate lined with paper towel. Transfer 2 ½ tablespoons of the bacon grease to a small saucepan and heat over medium heat.
    • Slowly mix the flour into the bacon grease. Cook until it just starts to smell nutty, stirring constantly (about 2 minutes).
      2 ½ tablespoons AP flour
    • Slowly add the milk while whisking, until there are no lumps. Continue to cook, whisking often, until thickened (1-2 minutes). If the gravy is too thick for your liking, whisk in a little more milk until desired consistency.
      1 cup milk
    • Season with salt and white pepper, to taste.
    • Serve!

    Notes

    • This recipe yields 1 cup gravy.
    • The fried bacon can be refrigerated for up to 5 days.
    • If you have leftover bacon grease on hand, you can use that up instead of cooking the bacon.
    • This white gravy is best used up within 2 days, but can be refrigerated for up to 4 days. For long-term storage, you can put it in airtight containers and freeze it. That way it can last up to four to six months.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 133kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 14mg | Sodium: 39mg | Potassium: 86mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 99IU | Calcium: 70mg | Iron: 1mg

    Strawberry Candy

    February 2, 2022 by Joss Dyckson 3 Comments

    Treat yourself on Valentine's Day, or any day, with homemade strawberry candy. When you pop one of these hard candies in your mouth, sweet strawberry flavor tingles your tastebuds. Wrap these candies individually for a special gift, or fill the candy dish on your coffee table.

    Strawberry hard candies in a jar.

    The red hue makes strawberry flavored candy ideal for Valentine's Day, but you can make these candies any time of year. Experiment with different molds to fill your candy dish with fun, festive shapes.

    I also have a recipe for Valentine's Day sheet cake that you might like. As for candy, I think you'd also love my homemade chocolate caramel bars and recipe tutorial for how to candy limes.

    SUMMARIZE & SAVE THIS CONTENT ON

    ChatGPT
    Google AI
    Perplexity
    Grok
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    🍓 About Strawberry Hard Candy

    According to the American Chemistry Society, hard candy is technically a form of glass made of sugar. The chemical process is similar where tiny grains are liquified and then cooled, and when you bite into hard candy, it cracks and shatters just like glass--except it's edible!

    If you really love hard candy, December 19 is national Hard Candy Day in the United States. Celebrate by making this strawberry candy at home and sharing it with friends and co-workers. They might not know about the holiday, but they'll appreciate getting free sweets.

    🥘 Ingredients

    Strawberry candy ingredients prepped on light background.
    • light corn syrup - One of the main reasons for using light corn syrup in candy making is to prevent the formation of sugar crystals. It also adds sweetness.
    • Strawberry flavoring - In this recipe I use super strength flavoring that holds up well to the heat involved in candy making. If you are using regular strength flavor/extract, you are going to want to double the amount you use to achieve similar flavor.
    • red food coloring - You can use gel or liquid food coloring for this recipe. Gel coloring has a more vibrant color and is more concentrated than liquid, so you can use less of it.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    🍽 Special Equipment

    • candy mold - I use a small heart candy mold because it is perfect for Valentine's Day, but you can use any small candy mold you like.
    • candy thermometer - This is a must because you want to get the correct consistency/hardness for your candy.
    • pastry brush - This is used to wipe down any crystals that form on the sides of the pot.
    • candy wrappers - The candy wrappers are optional. If you're giving them as gifts, I highly suggest wrapping them. It helps to keep them from sticking together and looks great.

    🔪 How to Make Strawberry Candy

    Sugar and syrup in a saucepan with spatula.

    Step 1. Add ingredients to saucepan. Lay out a piece of wax paper and set a candy mold right on top. In a small saucepan, combine the corn syrup, sugar and water over medium-high heat.

    Sugar and syrup mixture in a saucepan with spatula.

    Step 2. Heat. Cook, giving it an occasional stir, until the sugar completely dissolves. If you see any crystals forming on the sides of the pot, just brush them down with a wet pastry brush.

    Candy mixture in a saucepan with a thermometer.

    Step 3. Cook until hard-crack stage. Bring the mixture up to a boil, then lower the heat to medium. Cook, without stirring, until a candy thermometer reads 300°F, which takes about 8 minutes.

    Candy mix in a saucepan with a spatula.

    Step 4. Add flavor and color. Immediately remove from heat so that it doesn't get overcooked. When it stops bubbling, stir in the strawberry flavor and food coloring.

    Strawberry hard candy mixture in a pink heart mold.

    Step 5. Transfer to mold. Immediately pour or spoon the mixture into the candy mold.

    Strawberry candy mixture spread out in a pink heart mold.

    Step 6. Even it out. Glide over the top of the mold with a spatula right after pouring to ensure the candy is even and fills all of the cavities.

    Strawberry heart candies falling out of a pink heart mold.

    Step 7. Let harden. Let the candy sit until cooled and hardened. Now you can remove the candies from the mold!

    Strawberry heart candies in a pink heart mold.

    Step 8. Enjoy your homemade strawberry candy! Break off any excess candy to give them a cleaner look. Wrap the candies, if desired and enjoy!

    Chef's Note: Just remember to keep the strawberry hard candy out of reach of young children because they are a choking hazard.

    🍭 Candy Making Tips

    • You need to work quickly once you reach the hard-crack stage as it hardens up pretty fast.
    • It's very important to use a high accuracy thermometer.
    • This recipe makes a small batch of strawberry hard candy. Make sure you use a small saucepan so that the thermometer can be immersed in the mixture properly.
    • Work on top of wax paper for easier cleanup.
    • Make sure the mold is clean and dry.
    • Hard candies hold up well at room temperature, but don't let them sit out in the sun--if you do, you may find a melted puddle of red food coloring and corn syrup. Bring a cooler if you're transporting your strawberry candy in the heat.

    ❓ Strawberry Candy FAQs

    Do you have to refrigerate homemade strawberry candy?

    No, but you should store the candies in a container in a dry, dark place at room temperature.

    Do I need a thermometer to make strawberry candy?

    You don't have to, but it is highly recommended to get an accurate reading of the candy temperature as it's cooking to hard-crack stage. If you simply estimate and get it wrong, you could end up with really sticky candy (undercooked) or burnt candy (overcooked).

    Wrapped strawberry hard candies in a red box.

    🍬 More Sweet Candy Recipes to Try

    • Chocolate covered coffee beans in white dish.
      How to Make Chocolate Covered Coffee Beans
    • Green homemade gummies on cutting board.
      How to Make Gummies at Home
    • Cuban lunch chocolate bars stacked.
      Cuban Lunch Chocolate Bar Recipe
    • Chocolate truffles in a white dish.
      Gourmet Dark Chocolate Truffles

    If you tried this Strawberry Hard Candy Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Strawberry heart-shaped candies in jar.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Strawberry Candy

    These strawberry flavored hard candies are a fun idea for Valentine's Day or any day of the year when you're craving a sweet, homemade treat.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegan, Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cooling Time 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 25 minutes minutes
    Servings 55 candies
    Calories 9kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Small candy mold
    • Candy Thermometer
    • Pastry brush
    • Candy Wrappers (optional)
    • Wax paper

    Ingredients

    • ½ cup light corn syrup
    • ¼ cup white sugar
    • ⅛ cup water
    • 1 teaspoon strawberry flavoring super strength
    • 10 drops red food coloring
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Lay out a piece of wax paper and place a candy mold on top. Add the corn syrup, sugar and water to a small saucepan over medium-high heat.
      ½ cup light corn syrup, ¼ cup white sugar, ⅛ cup water
      White corn syrup in saucepan.
    • Cook and stir occasionally until the sugar is completely dissolved, about 3 minutes. If any crystals have formed on the sides of the pot, brush them down with a wet pastry brush.
      Sugar and syrup mixture in a saucepan with spatula.
    • Bring to a boil and then turn the heat down to medium. Cook, without stirring, until a candy thermometer reads 300°F (hard-crack stage). This takes about 8 minutes for me.
      Candy mixture in a saucepan with a thermometer.
    • Remove from heat immediately. Once the mixture is no longer bubbling, stir in the strawberry flavor and food coloring.
      1 teaspoon strawberry flavoring, 10 drops red food coloring
      Candy mix in a saucepan with a spatula.
    • Immediately pour or spoon the mixture into a candy mold.
      Strawberry hard candy mixture in a pink heart mold.
    • Scrape the top of the mold with a spatula directly after pouring to ensure the candy is even and fills all of the cavities.
      Strawberry candy mixture spread out in a pink heart mold.
    • Let the candy sit until cooled and hardened (at least 10 minutes). Release from molds. Break off any excess candy.
      Strawberry heart candies falling out of a pink heart mold.
    • Wrap the candies, if desired and enjoy!
      Strawberry hard candies scattered on white surface.

    Notes

    • Store in a container in a dry, dark place at room temperature.
    • Hard candies hold up well at room temperature, but don't let them sit out in the sun--if you do, you may find a melted puddle of red food coloring and corn syrup. Bring a cooler if you're transporting your strawberry candy in the heat.
    • Keep out of reach of young children because hard candy is a choking hazard.
    • This recipe uses super strength flavoring. If you are using a regular strength flavor extract, double the amount.
    • You need to work quickly once you reach the hard-crack stage.
    • It's important to use a thermometer. Use a small saucepan so that the thermometer can be immersed far enough into the liquid.
    • Work on top of wax paper for easier cleanup.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 9kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Fat: 1g | Sodium: 2mg | Potassium: 1mg | Sugar: 3g | Calcium: 1mg

    Kimchi Potato Salad

    January 26, 2022 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    In this kimchi potato salad, spicy kimchi and creamy potato salad come together to create a refreshing, fusion dish with a hit of tang. Surprise your guests with the flavors of Korean food in this 20-minute side dish.

    Kimchi potato salad in white bowl, chives on the side.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    ✔️ Why This Recipe Works

    • Easy. It's easy to make with only 5 ingredients.
    • Delicious. The delicious, umami flavor from the kimchi elevates your basic potato salad.
    • Versatile. The fusion flavors of this dish go with many proteins such as my grilled bison steak and grilled bratwurst sausage.
    • Buffet-friendly. It's perfect for serving a small family all the way up to a large crowd for a buffet or potluck.

    🥘 Ingredients

    Kimchi potato salad ingredients prepped and labeled on grey background.
    • yellow potatoes - Also known as Yukon Gold.
    • kimchi mayo - It's quick and easy to make! However, you can substitute the kimchi mayo with regular mayo if you aren't in the mood for making it.
    • purple top white globe turnip - Daikon radish is a good substitute for the turnip as it looks and tastes similar although not as sweet. It fits the Asian theme and it's a typical ingredient in kimchi.
    • fermented kimchi - You can make your own kimchi or find it at the supermarket or farmers' markets where it is becoming increasingly popular.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    🔪 How to Make Kimchi Potato Salad

    Raw, cubed potatoes in a pot.

    Step 1: Add potatoes to pot. Add the potatoes to a large pot, cover them with water and season with some salt.

    Cooked, cubed potatoes in a pot.

    Step 2: Cook and drain potatoes. Bring water to a boil over high heat. Turn the heat down to medium-low and simmer until potatoes are just fork-tender, about 8 to 12 minutes. Drain the potatoes in a colander, rinse with cold water and let cool.

    Kimchi mayo and potatoes in small casserole dish.

    Step 3: Combine potatoes with mayo. In a large bowl, gently combine the potatoes with the kimchi mayo.

    Kimchi potato salad ingredients in small casserole dish.

    Step 4: Add vegetables. Add the red onion, turnip and chopped kimchi.

    Kimchi potato salad mixed in casserole dish.

    Step 5: Season. Stir until well combined. Season with salt, to taste.

    Kimchi potato salad in white bowl, kimchi mayo and chives on the side.

    Step 6: Serve. Serve the kimchi potato salad right away or chill in the refrigerator for a few hours for best results. Garnish with fresh chives when ready to serve.

    🥗 What to Serve it With

    • Entrées. Since this potato salad with kimchi is cold and creamy, balance it out with hot and hearty entrées like brats, hamburgers, kimchi hot dog, ribs or pork chops. Serve it with my super delicious, grilled kimchi chicken. If you're cutting back on red meat, serve kimchi potato salad with seafood like salmon, shrimp or cod (such as these kimchi cod tacos).
    • Other sides. Hot vegetable side dishes like corn on the cob contrast with the light, slightly sweet flavor of potato salad. As for a cool side, this kimchi crab coleslaw fits the Asian fusion theme.
    • Drinks. Try my summer blueberry mojito mocktail or this fog cutter cocktail with citrus flavors that complement the kimchi well.

    💭 Joss' Tips

    • Cube the potatoes. Cubing the potatoes before cooking them will also result in more evenly cooked potatoes. You want to cook them until tender but not mushy or you'll be having mashed-ish potatoes instead of potato salad.
    • Start potatoes in cold water. Start the potatoes in cold water and then bring it up to heat for nice and even cooking.
    • Salt the water. Seasoning the cooking water for the potatoes will result in a more flavorful potato as they will absorb some of that salty water when they're cooking.
    • Let the potatoes cool. Rinsing the potatoes with cold water will stop them from cooking further as well as help cool them down. It's best to combine cooled potatoes with the mayo-based dressing to avoid the mayo becoming oily.
    • Bake the potatoes. You could even try baked potatoes for a different texture. Check out my tutorial for how to bake potatoes in the oven without foil.

    ❓ Kimchi Potato Salad FAQs

    How much potato salad per person?

    The general serving size for potato salad is at least 1 cup per person as a side dish. The serving size may vary depending on how many side dishes are available.

    If you are feeding a large crowd buffet-style, you may want to consider making 1.5 to 2 times the serving size (1 ½ to 2 cups per person) to make sure you have enough to go around. Some guests will go back for seconds, so making a little extra is a good idea. Besides, who doesn't like potato salad leftovers?

    How long is potato salad good for?

    Potato salad can be left out at room temperature for 1 to 2 hours maximum (make sure it is chilled well first). You can store leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge--just make sure they are eaten within 3 to 5 days. Theoretically, you can freeze potato salad for up to 3 months, but freezing tends to ruin the texture.

    Kimchi potato salad in white bowl.

    ❤️ More Kimchi Recipes You Will Love

    • Kimchi dumplings arranged on plate with dipping sauce.
      Kimchi Dumplings
    • Kimchi carbonara in a bowl.
      Kimchi Carbonara
    • Kimchi chowder with corn in bowl.
      Kimchi Chowder
    • Deviled eggs with kimchi, pickled veggies and cilantro on parchment.
      Kimchi Deviled Eggs

    If you tried this 🥔 Kimchi Potato Salad Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Kimchi potato salad with chives in white bowl.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Kimchi Potato Salad

    In this kimchi potato salad, spicy kimchi and creamy potato salad come together to create a refreshing, fusion dish with a hit of tang.
    Course Salad, Side Dish
    Cuisine German, Korean
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 8 minutes minutes
    Total Time 18 minutes minutes
    Servings 5
    Calories 416kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    • 5 cups yellow potatoes (Yukon Gold) peeled and cubed
    • ¾ cup kimchi mayo or regular mayo
    • ¼ cup red onion diced
    • ¼ cup turnip peeled and grated
    • 1 cup kimchi chopped
    • salt to taste
    • fresh chives diced (to garnish)
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Add the potatoes to a large pot, cover them with water and season with some salt.
      5 cups yellow potatoes (Yukon Gold)
      Raw, cubed potatoes in a pot.
    • Bring water to a boil over high heat. Turn the heat down to medium-low and simmer until potatoes are just fork-tender, about 8 to 12 minutes. Drain the potatoes in a colander, rinse with cold water and let cool.
      Cooked, cubed potatoes in a pot.
    • In a large bowl, gently combine the potatoes with the kimchi mayo.
      ¾ cup kimchi mayo
      Kimchi mayo and potatoes in small casserole dish.
    • Add the red onion, turnip and chopped kimchi.
      ¼ cup red onion, ¼ cup turnip, 1 cup kimchi
      Kimchi potato salad ingredients in small casserole dish.
    • Stir until well combined. Season with salt, to taste.
      Kimchi potato salad mixed in casserole dish.
    • Serve right away or chill in the refrigerator for a few hours for best results. Garnish with fresh chives when ready to serve.
      Kimchi potato salad in white bowl, kimchi mayo and chives on the side.

    Notes

    • Cube the potatoes. Cubing the potatoes before cooking them will also result in more evenly cooked potatoes. You want to cook them until tender but not mushy or you'll be having mashed-ish potatoes instead of potato salad.
    • Storage. Potato salad can be refrigerated for up to 3 to 5 days.
    • Mayo substitute. If you click on the kimchi mayo in the ingredient list, it takes you to my kimchi mayo recipe. It's quick and easy to make! However, you can substitute the kimchi mayo with regular mayo if you aren't in the mood for making it.
    • White turnip substitute. Daikon radish is a good substitute for the turnip as it looks and tastes similar although not as sweet. It fits the Asian theme and it's a typical ingredient in kimchi.
    • Serving size per person. The general serving size for potato salad is at least 1 cup per person as a side dish. The serving size may vary depending on how many other side dishes are available.
    • Buffet serving. If you are feeding a large crowd buffet-style, you may want to consider making 1.5 to 2 times the serving size (1 ½ to 2 cups per person) to make sure you have enough to go around.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 416kcal | Carbohydrates: 43g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 25g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 15g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 14mg | Sodium: 232mg | Potassium: 1027mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 27IU | Vitamin C: 49mg | Calcium: 35mg | Iron: 2mg

    Kimchi Burritos

    January 24, 2022 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    These kimchi burritos are filled with sautéed and fresh veggies, chicken tenders, cheese, beans, rice and of course-kimchi! With both high-protein and high-carb ingredients like the black beans, chicken and rice, this dish will fill you up and keep you satisfied for a long time.

    Kimchi burritos on wooden circular serving plate with a bowl of red sauce.

    A quick sauté of the ingredients, piling them up in tortillas and wrapping them in foil to heat through makes for an easy and delicious meal for the whole family.

    Burritos are often made with ground beef, like in my creamy burrito casserole but I use chicken tenders in this recipe to switch it up. The combination of kimchi and chicken is delicious and I often put the two together, just like in my kimchi chicken rice bowl and kimchi chicken thighs. You can check out more kimchi recipes here.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Kimchi Burrito Ingredients

    Kimchi burrito ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • chicken tenders - Chicken tenders are a specific part of the chicken, taken from underneath the breast. They are sometimes called chicken tenderloins.
    • Mexican seasoning - Or taco seasoning spices.
    • bell peppers - A mix of bell pepper colors is good.
    • red onion - You can substitute with white onion or yellow onion if desired.
    • soft flour tortillas - They should be large, around 10".
    • rice - Either white or brown cooked rice.
    • black beans - Canned beans should be drained and rinsed well.
    • shredded lettuce - I use iceberg but you can also use romaine.
    • kimchi - Drain it well and chop it into smaller pieces.
    • Monterey Jack cheese - Can also use cheddar cheese but I love the melty texture and mild flavor of Monterey Jack.
    • toppings - Such as hot sauce and/or salsa, sour cream and fresh cilantro.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make it

    Prepare the Filling

    Raw chicken tenders in a bowl with Mexican spices.

    Step #1. In a bowl, toss the raw chicken tenders with the Mexican seasoning and some salt. Heat the oil in a skillet over medium-high heat.

    Slice peppers, onions and chicken strips in a frying pan.

    Step #2. Add the chicken tenders to the pan and fry until golden and cooked through to 165°F. Remove from pan and reserve. Add the peppers and onions to the same pan and stir fry for 2-3 minutes, until tender-crisp. Reserve.

    How to Fold the Burrito

    Kimchi burrito filling on tortilla, prepped ingredients in the background.

    Step #3. Preheat oven to 350°F. In the center of a flour tortilla, add about ¼ to ⅓ cup rice. Top the rice with some of the chicken, peppers, onions, black beans, lettuce and kimchi. Top with ⅓ cup shredded cheese.

    Tortilla with burrito ingredients.

    Step #4. Fold the sides of the tortilla over the filling.

    Tortilla with burrito ingredients being wrapped up.

    Step #5. Fold the bottom of the tortilla over the filling.

    Wrapped up uncooked burrito on wooden background.

    Step #6. Roll the kimchi burrito up tightly.

    Baking Instructions

    Uncooked burrito on piece of foil.

    Step #7. Wrap the burrito in a 12" square piece of foil. Repeat with remaining tortillas. Arrange the foil-wrapped burritos on a baking sheet. Bake in the preheated oven until heated through, about 15 minutes.

    Kimchi burritos sliced and stacked on serving tray.

    Step #8. Serve. Slice the kimchi burritos in half and serve!

    How to Freeze Burritos

    To freeze a kimchi burrito:

    • First, cool the fillings before tightly wrapping them in the tortillas to avoid a soggy mess.
    • Do not include certain fresh ingredients like lettuce because they do not freeze well.
    • Tightly wrap the burritos in parchment paper to avoid freezer burn and conveniently reheat them later.
    • Put them in a freezer bag, and write the date on it.
    • You can freeze burritos for up to 3 months.

    How to Reheat Frozen Burritos

    • To reheat the burritos in oven: keep them wrapped in the parchment or foil, place them on a sheet pan and heat them in the oven at 350°F for about 45 minutes or until warmed through. If you like a crispy outside, remove the parchment and bake for another 5 to 10 minutes. (To cook them quicker, you can thaw them in the fridge overnight and then bake.)
    • In a pan: To pan fry, simply thaw the burritos in the fridge overnight and fry them for a few minutes per side over medium heat. This will also result in a crispier kimchi burrito.
    • Microwave: Although you can, I don't recommend reheating them in the microwave, because your kimchi burrito might become soggy.

    Serving Suggestions

    • The simplest side for the kimchi burrito is tortilla chips with dip; it is a classic side dish, it has good crunch, and you can enjoy any kind of dip with it.
    • If you wish to enjoy a lighter and healthier side, there are various salads that would pair well with this recipe like coleslaw and chopped salad.
    • Mexican side dishes like street corn, black bean soup or a Mexican soup are also great.
    • Asian side dishes, since this is a fusion dish, would also work: Korean style coleslaw, edamame beans, stir-fried bok choy, cucumber salad, etc.
    • Toppings and condiments like sour cream, guacamole and salsa can add a lot of flavor to your burritos.

    Recipe FAQs

    How long do leftover burritos last in the fridge?

    Cover the leftovers well and store them in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 days.

    Where did burritos originate and who invented them?

    One theory is that burritos were invented by Juan Méndez, a street vendor in Chihuahua, Mexico during the 1910s. He wrapped his food in a flour tortilla to keep it warm and for easier transport on his donkey.

    Why is it called a burrito?

    The word 'burrito' translates to 'little donkey' in Spanish. This may seem like a confusing name for the dish, but if the Méndez theory is correct, the burrito did find its beginnings on the back of a donkey. The rolled tortilla holds a large amount of filling, much like a donkey could inside the packs on its back.

    Kimchi burritos sliced and stacked on serving tray with toothpick.

    More Kimchi Recipes to Try

    • Kimchi potato salad with chives in white bowl.
      Kimchi Potato Salad
    • Kimchi quesadillas on serving tray.
      Kimchi Quesadillas
    • Kimchi fries with cheese in baking dish.
      Kimchi Fries
    • Sliced kimchi pizza on round serving board.
      Kimchi Pizza

    If you tried this 🌯 Kimchi Burrito Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Kimchi burritos cut open and stacked with toothpick.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Kimchi Burritos

    These kimchi burritos are filled with sautéed and fresh veggies, chicken tenders, cheese, beans, rice and of course-kimchi!
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine Korean, Mexican
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 20 minutes minutes
    Total Time 35 minutes minutes
    Servings 6 burritos
    Calories 613kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    For the Stir Fry

    • 1 pounds chicken tenders sliced
    • 1 tablespoon Mexican seasoning or taco seasoning
    • 1 tablespoon canola oil
    • ½ red bell pepper thinly sliced
    • ½ green bell pepper thinly sliced
    • ½ cup red onion thinly sliced
    • Salt

    For the Burritos

    • 6 large soft flour tortillas 10"
    • 2 cups rice cooked
    • 1 cup black beans drained and rinsed
    • 1 cup lettuce shredded
    • 1 cup kimchi drained and chopped
    • 2 cups Monterey Jack cheese shredded

    To Serve (Optional)

    • hot sauce and/or salsa
    • sour cream
    • fresh cilantro chopped
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    For the Stir Fry

    • In a bowl, toss the raw chicken tenders with the Mexican seasoning and some salt. Heat the oil in a skillet over medium-high heat.
    • Add the chicken tenders to the pan and fry until golden and cooked through to 165°F. Remove from pan and reserve.
    • Add the peppers and onions to the same pan and stir fry for 2-3 minutes, until tender-crisp. Reserve.

    For the Burritos

    • Preheat oven to 350°F. In the center of a flour tortilla, add about ¼ to ⅓ cup rice. Top the rice with some of the chicken, peppers and onions.
    • Next, add some black beans, lettuce and kimchi. Top with ⅓ cup shredded cheese.
    • Fold the sides over and then tightly roll up the burrito.
    • Wrap the burrito in a 12" square piece of foil. Repeat with remaining tortillas.
    • Arrange the foil-wrapped burritos on a baking sheet. Bake in the preheated oven until heated through, about 15 minutes.
    • Serve with the hot sauce, sour cream and cilantro.

    Notes

    • Folding the burrito: Check out the post for how to fold the burrito up.
    • Fridge storage: Cover the leftovers well and store them in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 days.
    • To freeze a kimchi burrito:
      • First, cool the fillings before tightly wrapping them in the tortillas to avoid a soggy mess.
      • Do not include certain fresh ingredients like lettuce because they do not freeze well.
      • Tightly wrap the burritos in parchment paper to avoid freezer burn and conveniently reheat them later.
      • Put them in a freezer bag, and write the date on it.
      • You can freeze burritos for up to 3 months.
    • Reheating instructions for Frozen Burritos:
      • To reheat the burritos: keep them wrapped in the parchment or foil, place them on a sheet pan and heat them in the oven at 350°F for about 45 minutes or until warmed through. If you like a crispy outside, remove the parchment and bake for another 5 to 10 minutes. (To cook them quicker, you can thaw them in the fridge overnight and then bake.)
      • To pan fry, simply thaw the burritos in the fridge overnight and fry them for a few minutes per side over medium heat. This will also result in a crispier burrito.
      • Although you can, I don't recommend reheating them in the microwave, because your kimchi burrito might become soggy.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 613kcal | Carbohydrates: 75g | Protein: 35g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 82mg | Sodium: 535mg | Potassium: 603mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 761IU | Vitamin C: 23mg | Calcium: 348mg | Iron: 3mg

    Kimchi Mayo (2 Ways)

    January 19, 2022 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    Use this flavorful kimchi mayo to elevate your favorite dishes with a hit of spicy, umami flavor! Two different options for preparing this recipe allow for varying levels of convenience, depending on how much time you have to make it.

    Homemade kimchi mayo in jar with spoon.

    Option #1 is quick and easy and gives you delicious mayo in a flash.

    Option #2 is a more do-it-yourself approach and allows the freedom to adjust individual ingredients to suit your taste. This one is my favorite.

    This creamy, homemade kimchi mayo is sure to add an extra dimension of flavor to any dish such as my kimchi fish tacos or kimchi deviled eggs. It tastes slightly sweet, spicy, tangy and umami all at once!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Option #1 Quick Kimchi Mayo

    Ingredients

    Kimchi in jar and mayo in small black dish labeled.

    You only need 2 ingredients for this quick mayo:

    • mayo - I like to use a thick mayo since we're adding ingredients to it and that can thin it out.
    • kimchi - Either you can buy a jar of kimchi from the grocery store or make your own kimchi from scratch.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make it

    Option #1 yields approximately 1 ⅔ cups mayo (26 tablespoons).

    Kimchi mayo ingredients in food processor.

    Step 1: Add the ingredients to a blender or food processor.

    Kimchi mayo in food processor.

    Step 2: Blend until smooth.

    Kimchi mayo in small jar with spoon.

    Step 3: Transfer to a jar or squeeze bottle.

    Kimchi mayo on small plate with spoon.

    Step 4: Serve!

    Option #2 Kimchi Mayo From Scratch

    With this option we are making the mayo from scratch instead of using prepared mayo. It yields approximately 1 cup mayo (16 tablespoons).

    Ingredients

    Kimchi mayo from scratch ingredients prepped and labeled on grey background.
    • kimchi brine - The kimchi brine is simply the liquid in the jar of kimchi and it has a huge amount of flavor. Drain the liquid from the jar and reserve the kimchi for another use.
    • Dijon mustard - I like to use the smooth Dijon mustard for this recipe instead of the whole-grain to keep the mayo nice and smooth.
    • lime juice - I recommend using freshly squeezed lime juice.
    • canola oil - Canola has a neutral flavor and light texture which is perfect for homemade mayo.

    *Check recipe card for full ingredients and amounts.

    Chef's Note: Add diced chili peppers to turn up the heat, or additional lime juice for a more zesty taste. After about a day, the ingredients will marinate further and add even more depth to the flavor.

    How to Make it

    Egg yolks and mustard in bowl.

    Step 1: Add the egg yolks, mustard and lime juice to a medium bowl. Whisk until combined.

    Homemade mayo being prepared in bowl with whisk.

    Step 2: Add a small amount of the canola oil while whisking constantly, until completely combined. Continue adding small amounts of the oil, completely combining each time, until the mixture thickens.

    Pro Tip: Be patient and add the oil very slowly so that the mayo doesn't split.

    Kimchi brine pouring into homemade mayo.

    Step 3: When the mayo becomes thick and spoon-able, you know it's ready. Mix in the kimchi brine. Season with the sugar and salt.

    Kimchi mayo in jar and on metal spoon.

    Step 4: Transfer to a glass jar, airtight container or squeeze bottle.

    Serving Suggestions

    • This mayo makes an excellent topping for many Korean dishes, including beef bulgogi, kimchi chicken or bibimbap and rice bowls.
    • It can be used in place of regular mayo for most dishes like sandwiches, wraps and burgers.
    • Use it as a dipping sauce for kimchi French fries and chicken fingers!
    • Try it in this delicious kimchi potato salad.
    • Make your next dish a fusion favorite by adding this Korean-style mayo.

    Recipe FAQs

    How long does it last in the fridge?

    Your freshly made Asian mayo should last up to 2 weeks in the refrigerator, so it is perfect to make ahead and reach for throughout the week any time you want to add the tangy flavor of kimchi to your meal.

    Is it vegan?

    Kimchi mayonnaise isn't normally vegan because mayo contains eggs and kimchi can contain seafood. However, you can find vegan mayo and kimchi brands on the market.

    Is it spicy?

    It will be slightly spicy but this will mostly depend on how spicy your kimchi is! You can make it hotter by adding some hot sauce if it isn't spicy enough for you.

    Homemade kimchi mayo in jar with kimchi brine in the background.

    ❤️ More Kimchi Recipes You Will Love

    • Kimchi mac and cheese in a bowl.
      Creamy Kimchi Mac and Cheese
    • Kimchi burritos cut open and stacked with toothpick.
      Kimchi Burritos
    • Kimchi hot dogs with small bowls of toppings on serving tray.
      Kimchi Hot Dogs
    • Kimchi rice bowl with chicken breast.
      Kimchi Rice Bowl

    If you tried this Kimchi Mayo Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Kimchi mayo in jar and on spoon.
    Print Pin
    5 from 6 votes

    Flavorful Kimchi Mayo

    Use this flavorful, kimchi mayo to elevate your favorite dishes with a hit of spicy, umami flavor! You have 2 options: use prepared mayo for a quicker option or make the mayo from scratch.
    Course Condiment
    Cuisine American, French, Korean
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Total Time 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 16 tablespoons
    Calories 132kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    Option #1 Quick Kimchi Mayo

    • 1 cup mayo
    • ½ cup kimchi with the brine

    Option #2 Kimchi Mayo From Scratch

    • 2 egg yolks
    • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
    • 1 ½ teaspoons lime juice
    • 1 cup canola oil approximately, will depend on desired thickness
    • 2 ½ tablespoons kimchi brine
    • ½ teaspoon sugar
    • salt to taste
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    Option #1 Quick Kimchi Mayo

    • Add the ingredients to a blender or food processor.
      Kimchi mayo ingredients in food processor.
    • Blend until smooth.
      Kimchi mayo in food processor.
    • Transfer to a glass jar, airtight container or squeeze bottle.
      Kimchi mayo in small jar with spoon.

    Option #2 Kimchi Mayo From Scratch

    • Add egg yolks, mustard and lime juice to a medium bowl. Whisk until combined.
      Egg yolks and mustard in bowl.
    • Add a small amount of the canola oil while whisking constantly, until completely combined. Continue adding small amounts of the oil, completely combining each time, until the mixture thickens. Be patient and add the oil very slowly so that it doesn't split.
      Homemade mayo being prepared in bowl with whisk.
    • When the mayo becomes thick and spoonable, you know it's ready. Mix in the kimchi brine. Season with the sugar and salt.
      Kimchi brine pouring into homemade mayo.
    • Transfer to a glass jar, airtight container or squeeze bottle.
      Homemade mayo in jar with spoon.

    Notes

    • Nutrition information is for option #2 (from scratch) per tablespoon.
    • Option #1 yields approximately 1 ⅔ cups mayo (26 tablespoons).
    • Option #2 yields approximately 1 cup mayo (16 tablespoons).
    • Keep the mayo refrigerated for up to two weeks.
    • It will be slightly spicy but this will mostly depend on how spicy your kimchi is! You can make it hotter by adding some hot sauce if it isn't spicy enough for you.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 132kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 24mg | Sodium: 5mg | Potassium: 3mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 33IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 3mg | Iron: 1mg

    Easy Tomato Gravy

    January 12, 2022 by Joss Dyckson 5 Comments

    Hot and savory, this easy tomato gravy adds rich, tangy flavor to your toast, biscuits and cornbread. Some call it gravy, others call it sauce--either way, it's a delicious addition to entrées and side dishes. Pour the simmering gravy over your meal, and enjoy Southern-inspired flavor with every bite.

    Tomato gravy in a small cast iron bowl, tomatoes on the vine and chives on the side.

    I usually serve this with electric skillet cornbread or these easy and quick biscuits but you can serve it over a number of dishes like scrambled eggs with kimchi and Swiss steak.

    This version is nice and easy because we are using canned, diced tomatoes so there is almost no prep work. Check out more delicious, homemade sauces here.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What is Tomato Gravy?

    Tomato gravy is a gravy made of fresh or canned tomatoes that is a breakfast staple in the South. It is typically drizzled over biscuits and scrambled eggs. It's made with a roux of fat and flour like a typical gravy would be.

    Ingredients

    Tomato gravy ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • canned diced tomatoes - Do not drain the tomatoes as you will need the liquid.
    • sugar - This is optional but it does enhance the flavor. If you're trying to avoid sugar, you can also use honey or agave nectar.
    • fresh chives - Optional garnish.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make Tomato Gravy

    This recipe yields approximately 2 ½ cups gravy.

    Golden tomato gravy roux in pan.

    Step 1. Make a Roux. Heat the olive oil in a skillet over medium heat. Whisk in the flour and cook, stirring constantly, until it starts to become golden.

    Tomato gravy thickened in pan.

    Step 2. Simmer. Slowly add the chicken broth, whisking constantly. Stir in the diced tomatoes, sugar, salt and pepper. Simmer until the liquid thickens, stirring occasionally.

    Tomato gravy in a small cast iron bowl.

    Step 3. Serve. If desired, you can sprinkle some fresh chives on top. Serve immediately for best results.

    Serving Suggestions

    • For a traditional approach, you can serve your homemade tomato gravy on biscuits, scrambled eggs or omelettes (I have a great recipe for kimchi omelettes), polenta and shrimp and grits.
    • It adds flavor and nutrients to rice and other grains.
    • For sit-down dinners, pour tomato gravy over bison meatloaf, chicken, Swiss steak or pork chops.
    • You can try cooking this gravy in the same pan that you used for bacon and sausage (using the meat drippings instead of olive oil) to add some savory, meaty flavor.

    Recipe FAQs

    What are the origins of tomato gravy?

    Although it is hard to pinpoint the exact origins of tomato gravy, it has its roots and popularity in Southern culture. When they didn't have other ingredients, tomatoes made a delicious, savory gravy that they poured over biscuits, toast, grits and polenta. It became a good way to use up tomatoes that were ripening.

    How long do leftovers last in the fridge?

    Store in a covered container in the fridge for up to 4 to 5 days. Reheat on the stove.

    Can you freeze leftovers?

    Yes! You can freeze it for up to 3 to 6 months, but make sure to cool it before putting it in the freezer. Thaw it in the fridge overnight before reheating it on the stove.

    Hottest Tips From Readers

    • From Richard: "Add a little cinnamon and blend in half a small fried onion." That sounds like a decent addition.
    • From DKnuckles: "...NEVER use olive oil!! It should always be made with bacon drippings!!!!..." Oops, sorry, I use olive oil. I'm sure the drippings taste delicious but this healthier version is also amazing! Tomatoes and olive oil are a great combination.
    Tomato gravy in a small cast iron bowl, dripping off of a soup spoon.

    More Delicious Gravies to Try

    • Sawmill gravy in white bowl.
      Homemade Sawmill Sausage Gravy
    • Ham gravy in dish with parsley.
      Ham Gravy
    • Brown gravy in gravy dish with fresh herbs.
      Homemade Brown Gravy Recipe
    • Chocolate gravy drizzling from spoon over pot.
      Easy Homemade Chocolate Gravy

    If you tried this 🍅 Easy Tomato Gravy Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Tomato gravy in cast iron bowl with spoon.
    Print Pin
    4.50 from 2 votes

    Easy Tomato Gravy

    Hot and savory, this easy tomato gravy adds rich, tangy flavor to your toast, biscuits, cornbread and more. Pour the simmering gravy over your meal, and enjoy Southern-inspired flavor with every bite.
    Course Sauce
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 3 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 6 minutes minutes
    Total Time 9 minutes minutes
    Servings 5 ½ cup servings
    Calories 137kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    • ¼ cup olive oil
    • ¼ cup all-purpose flour
    • 1 ½ cups chicken broth
    • 1 ½ cups canned diced tomatoes with the liquid
    • 1 teaspoon sugar optional
    • salt and pepper to taste
    • fresh chives diced (optional)
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Heat the olive oil in a skillet over medium heat. Whisk in the flour and cook, stirring constantly, until it starts to become golden, about 4 minutes.
      ¼ cup olive oil, ¼ cup all-purpose flour
    • Slowly add the chicken broth, whisking constantly. Stir in the diced tomatoes and sugar. Season with salt and pepper.
      1 ½ cups chicken broth, 1 ½ cups canned diced tomatoes, 1 teaspoon sugar
    • Bring to a simmer and cook until the liquid thickens, stirring occasionally, about 2 to 3 minutes.
    • If desired, you can sprinkle some fresh chives on top. Serve over biscuits, rice, mashed potatoes, cornbread, polenta, eggs, pork, chicken, meatloaf, etc.

    Notes

    • Yield: This recipe yields approximately 2 ½ cups gravy.
    • Fridge Storage: Store covered in a container in the fridge for up to 4 to 5 days. Reheat on the stove.
    • Freezer Storage: You can also freeze it for up to 3 to 6 months, but make sure to cool it before putting it in the freezer. Thaw it in the fridge overnight before reheating it on the stove.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 137kcal | Carbohydrates: 9g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 361mg | Potassium: 199mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 86IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 28mg | Iron: 1mg

    Kimchi Bacon Fried Rice

    January 10, 2022 by Joss Dyckson 2 Comments

    This kimchi-bacon fried rice recipe is a delicious, comforting side dish or main course with a Korean twist. It is easy to cook and easy to clean up afterwards because all the ingredients, including the vegetables and bacon, are cooked in one wok or frying pan. No need for extra pans!

    Kimchi bacon fried rice in bowl, with fork and knife on the side.

    Fried rice is great, but with the added kimchi and bacon, the flavors are elevated to another level. I love adding kimchi to my recipes, like in this kimchi slaw. Check out how to make this dish below.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Kimchi Bacon Fried Rice Ingredients

    Kimchi bacon fried rice ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • kimchi - You can find it in the refrigerated Asian section of the grocery store or you can ferment your own kimchi.
    • white rice - One of the most important ingredients in this kimchi-bacon fried rice recipe (besides the kimchi) is the rice. It is recommended to use older rice (rice that was cooked 2 to 3 days ago) because it is drier, lowering the chances of a soggy dish. This recipe makes for a great way to use up leftover rice.
    • bacon - I usually use thick-cut bacon.
    • onions - Yellow onions are best for cooking.
    • peas - I use frozen sweet peas and thaw them in the refrigerator before using in this recipe.
    • mushrooms - Regular button or cremini mushrooms will do.
    • carrots - Not pictured.

    *Check recipe card for full ingredient amounts.

    Tweaks

    • Rice: While jasmine rice is a popular choice, you can use basmati or another long-grain rice because they end up fluffier and less sticky after cooking. Brown rice, although it can take a bit more time to cook, is another alternative.
    • Bacon: Here is a substitution idea for the pork bacon: instead of regular bacon, use turkey bacon. However, you might want to add a bit of olive oil for cooking the vegetables because turkey bacon has less fat than regular bacon.

    How to Make it

    Chopped raw bacon in frying pan.

    Step 1: Add bacon to wok or pan. Add chopped bacon to a wok or frying pan.

    Chopped, golden bacon in frying pan.

    Step 2: Cook bacon. Cook over medium heat until golden and crispy.

    Cooked bacon bits in a spoon over paper towel, pan in the background.

    Step 3: Reserve bacon. Remove and reserve the bacon in a paper towel lined dish. Leave 1 tablespoon of the bacon drippings in the pan, but remove the rest.

    Stir fried veggies in pan with wooden spoon.

    Step 4: Sauté the vegetables. Add the onion, mushrooms, carrots, red bell peppers, and green onions to the frying pan. Sauté until tender, about 4 minutes.

    Rice, vegetables and bacon in frying pan.

    Step 5: Add the rice & bacon. Add the cooked rice and bacon to the wok. Mix them with the sautéed vegetables.

    Kimchi bacon fried rice in frying pan with a wooden spoon on element.

    Step 6: Add the other ingredients. Add the sesame oil, soy sauce, peas and kimchi. Stir to combine and heat through.

    Kimchi bacon fried rice in bowl, with fork and knife on the side, sliced green onions in the background.

    Step 7: Serve. Garnish with the fresh green onions and serve.

    How to Store the Leftovers

    • Store leftovers covered in a container in the fridge for up to 5 days.
    • You can also freeze the rice for up to 1 month in freezer-safe containers, but let it cool first.

    Kimchi Bacon Fried Rice FAQs

    What does kimchi fried rice taste like?

    It's a fusion of flavors with the kimchi giving umami, spicy flavor to the neutral flavor of fried rice.

    What goes well with kimchi fried rice?

    Kimchi fried rice goes well with chicken and pork dishes like Korean chicken or even tofu.

    How do you make kimchi fried rice less mushy?

    You want the rice to be fried, not steamed, so make sure you drain the kimchi well before adding it to the rice.

    Kimchi bacon fried rice in bowl, with fork and knife on the side.

    More Delicious Kimchi Recipes

    • Kimchi in a bowl.
      28 of Our Best Kimchi Recipes
    • Kimchi carbonara in a bowl.
      Kimchi Carbonara
    • Kimchi rice bowl with chicken breast.
      Kimchi Rice Bowl
    • Kimchi beef stew in Asian bowl.
      Easy Kimchi Beef Stew

    If you tried this Kimchi Bacon Fried Rice Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Kimchi bacon fried rice on a plate on brown background.
    Print Pin
    5 from 3 votes

    Kimchi Bacon Fried Rice

    This kimchi-bacon fried rice recipe is a delicious, comforting side dish or main course with a Korean twist. The flavors are elevated to another level.
    Course Main Course, Side Dish
    Cuisine Chinese, Korean
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 20 minutes minutes
    Servings 6
    Calories 417kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Frying pan

    Ingredients

    • 8 strips raw bacon chopped
    • 1 cup yellow onion chopped
    • 1 cup mushrooms thinly sliced
    • ½ cup carrots shredded
    • ½ red bell pepper sliced
    • ½ cup green onions sliced
    • 2 cups white rice cooked
    • 1 tablespoon sesame oil
    • 3 tablespoons soy sauce
    • 1 cup kimchi drained and chopped
    • 1 cup frozen peas thawed
    • sliced green onions to garnish
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Add chopped bacon to a wok or frying pan. Cook over medium heat until golden and crispy.
      8 strips raw bacon
      Chopped bacon in frying pan.
    • Remove and reserve the bacon in a paper towel lined dish. Leave 1 tablespoon of the bacon drippings in the pan, but remove the rest.
      Cooked bacon bits in a spoon over paper towel, pan in the background.
    • Add the onion, mushrooms, carrots, red bell peppers, and green onions to the frying pan. Sauté until tender, about 4 minutes.
      1 cup yellow onion, 1 cup mushrooms, ½ cup carrots, ½ red bell pepper, ½ cup green onions
      Veggies in frying pan.
    • Add the cooked rice and bacon to the wok. Mix them with the sautéed vegetables.
      2 cups white rice
      Rice, vegetables and bacon in frying pan.
    • Add the sesame oil, soy sauce, peas and kimchi. Stir to combine and heat through.
      1 tablespoon sesame oil, 3 tablespoons soy sauce, 1 cup kimchi
      Kimchi bacon fried rice in frying pan with a wooden spoon.
    • Garnish with the fresh green onions and serve.
      Kimchi bacon fried rice in bowl, with fork and knife on the side, sliced green onions in the background.

    Notes

    • Store leftovers covered in a container in the fridge for up to 5 days.
    • You can also freeze it for up to 1 month in freezer-safe containers, but let it cool first.
    • While jasmine rice is a popular choice, you can use basmati or another long-grain rice because they end up fluffier and less sticky after cooking. Brown rice, although it can take a bit more time to cook, is another alternative.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 417kcal | Carbohydrates: 59g | Protein: 11g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 19mg | Sodium: 712mg | Potassium: 375mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 2372IU | Vitamin C: 27mg | Calcium: 43mg | Iron: 2mg

    Tofu Marinade 3 Ways

    January 5, 2022 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    This easy, tofu marinade recipe gives you 3 different ways to amp up the flavor of your next tofu dish! If you're in a spicy mood, you may want to go with the Mexican option. For some classic Asian flavors you have a choice between teriyaki and savory umami. Check them out below.

    3 tofu marinades in small bowls with spoons.

    We commonly use marinades for tofu because it is very mild and without it, tofu would taste extremely bland! The best part is, tofu soaks up these flavors quickly, so it doesn't take long to transform it into something delicious!

    Overall, marinating tofu helps to turn its blank canvas into a flavorful and enjoyable protein source in any dish.

    Some of the dishes you can amp up the flavor of tofu in are a tofu stir fry served over rice, noodles or vegetables, vegetarian glazed tofu, oven-baked tofu, grilled tofu slices for burgers, etc.

    It all starts with a marinade and then you can take it in whatever cooking direction you please. Enjoy!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Tofu Marinade Ingredients

    1. Mexican Tofu Marinade

    Mexican tofu marinade in a small bowl with a spoon, tofu in the background.
    • canola oil - Or another vegetable oil.
    • lime juice - Freshly squeezed is best.
    • spicy chili sauce - Such as sriracha sauce.
    • Mexican blend seasoning - Or taco seasoning spice mix that includes spices like cumin, chili powder, paprika, garlic powder, oregano etc. (without cornstarch).
    • sugar - I use white sugar but a good alternative would be agave nectar.
    • fresh cilantro - Optional.

    2. Teriyaki Tofu Marinade

    Teriyaki tofu marinade in a small bowl with a spoon, tofu in the background.
    • soy sauce - I use regular soy sauce.
    • sesame oil - From toasted sesame seeds for best flavor.
    • orange juice - Freshly squeezed or prepared orange juice will work.
    • brown sugar - You can substitute with honey or white sugar but I find that brown sugar is the best for teriyaki.
    • ginger - Use fresh ginger that has been peeled.
    • garlic - Minced.
    • sesame seeds - Can use white sesame seeds or a mix of white and black.

    3. Umami Tofu Marinade

    Umami tofu marinade in a small bowl with a spoon, tofu in the background.
    • vegetable broth - I use vegetable broth as a vegan-friendly option for this marinade, but make sure to double-check the ingredient list on the package to ensure it's completely plant-based.
    • brown miso paste - There are different types of miso paste like white and red, but I use brown in this marinade. Brown miso paste is made from soy beans and brown rice.
    • soy sauce - For salty, umami flavor.
    • umami powder - The kind I use is a natural flavoring from mushrooms and you can find it easily online.
    • dried nori flakes - Nori flakes are made from seaweed and they are delicious. You might have seen nori used on rice crackers or in Asian soups such as kimchi tofu soup.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Marinate Tofu

    1. Simply whisk together the tofu marinade of your choice.
    2. Slice the tofu and add to marinade in a zip-top bag or container with a lid.
    3. Marinate the tofu for at least 30 minutes in the fridge, or up to 4 hours if you have the time.
    4. When you are ready to cook the tofu, remove it from the marinade.
    3 tofu marinades in small bowls with spoons, tofu on the side.

    Tip for Crispy Tofu

    Organic Raw Soy Tofu on a Wooden Background.

    If you want your tofu to be extra crispy and really absorb that marinade, there is a trick to removing some of the moisture before slicing:

    1. Remove the tofu from the water it is packed in.
    2. On a cutting board, place the tofu between a few pieces of paper towel and place a baking sheet on top.
    3. Place something heavy, like a cast iron skillet, on top of the baking sheet to apply pressure (you don't want it to be too heavy or the tofu will crumble).
    4. Let it rest for 20-30 minutes to remove some of the excess liquid.
    5. Keep an eye on the paper towels and if they are soaked, replace them with fresh ones.
    6. Continue to slice, marinate and cook as desired.

    There are also tofu presses available.

    What to Do With Leftover Tofu Marinade

    • If you have leftover marinade, it needs to be discarded or cooked. After marinating, it may contain harmful bacteria. If you choose to cook the marinade, make sure you boil it for 5 minutes.
    • Keep in mind that boiling it may change the flavor and/or thicken it. You may want to reserve some of the marinade before adding the protein if you plan on using it as a sauce or for another use. Marinade that hasn't been used can be refrigerated or frozen.
    • You can also cook it with the tofu dish: After frying your crispy tofu in the pan, you can add some of the leftover marinade to the pan and stir fry it with the tofu for extra flavor.

    Tofu Marinade FAQs

    Are the marinades vegan friendly?

    If you are following a vegan diet, no need to worry as all three marinades are vegan-friendly. Some people question whether or not nori flakes are vegan because oyster shells are used to attach nori seedlings to nets early in the process.

    Seaweed is placed in the category of sea vegetables and during production, animal by-products are not involved. Sources like PETA view nori seaweed as a healthy, vegan food product. If you are still concerned, you may want to ask the manufacturer what their processes are or simply omit the nori flakes.

    How long does tofu marinade last in the fridge?

    Marinade that hasn't been used can be refrigerated for up to 3 to 4 days in an airtight container.

    Can you freeze the marinades?

    Yes! They can be frozen for up to 6 months. Make sure to thaw them in the fridge.

    3 tofu marinades in small bowls with spoons.

    More Delicious Sauce Recipes For Marinating

    • Xo sauce in a jar.
      Easy XO Sauce Recipe
    • Jerk sauce in food processor.
      How to Make Jerk Sauce
    • Mole sauce in a bowl with cilantro and black sesame seeds.
      How to Make Mole Sauce
    • White BBQ sauce dripping from spoon.
      White BBQ Sauce

    If you tried this Tofu Marinade Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Tofu marinades in bowls.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Tofu Marinade 3 Ways

    This easy, tofu marinade recipe gives you 3 different ways to amp up the flavor of your next tofu dish! The 3 flavors include Mexican, teriyaki and umami.
    Course Sauce
    Cuisine Japanese, Mexican
    Diet Vegan, Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Total Time 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 16 tablespoons
    Calories 66kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    Mexican Marinade

    • ½ cup canola oil
    • ¼ cup lime juice
    • 2 tablespoons spicy chili sauce such as sriracha
    • 2 tablespoons Mexican blend seasoning or taco spice mix
    • 1 teaspoon sugar
    • ⅓ cup fresh cilantro chopped
    • salt to taste

    Teriyaki Marinade

    • ⅓ cup soy sauce
    • ⅓ cup sesame oil
    • ⅓ cup orange juice
    • 2 tablespoons brown sugar or honey
    • 1 tablespoon ginger grated
    • 2 cloves garlic minced
    • 1 tablespoon sesame seeds optional

    Umami Marinade

    • ¾ cup vegetable broth
    • ⅓ cup brown miso paste
    • 1 tablespoon soy sauce
    • ½ teaspoon umami powder
    • ¼ cup dried nori flakes
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Whisk all of the ingredients (for the marinade of your choice) together.
    • Cut the tofu into strips, cubes, slices, or as needed. Let the tofu marinate in the sauce (in the refrigerator) for at least 30 minutes or up to 4 hours if you have the time.
    • When you are ready to cook the tofu, remove it from the marinade.

    Notes

    • Nutrition information is for the first marinade (Mexican) per tablespoon.
    • For extra flavorful/crispy tofu, see how to remove some moisture before marinating (above in post).
    • If you have leftover marinade, it needs to be discarded or cooked. After marinating, it may contain harmful bacteria. If you choose to cook the marinade, make sure you boil it for 5 minutes.
    • Marinade that hasn't been used can be refrigerated for up to 3 to 4 days or frozen for up to 6 months.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 66kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 1g | Sodium: 51mg | Potassium: 13mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 66IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 1mg | Iron: 1mg

    Kimchi Pizza

    December 29, 2021 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    This kimchi pizza recipe is a flavorful fusion of sour kimchi, savory vegetables and the classic pizza dough with melty cheese and marinara. Using a premade pizza dough, it all comes together hot and ready to eat in less than 30 minutes.

    Sliced kimchi pizza on circular wooden cutting board, kimchi and chili pepper flakes on the side.

    It might sound odd to put kimchi on pizza but I've been in the habit of adding kimchi to many unexpected foods: kimchi fries, kimchi chowder and even kimchi cream cheese; you get the point. The end results are usually flavorful and delicious!

    Some people tend to omit the sauce and cheese with Asian pizzas because of the unorthodox mixture. But trust me, the kimchi tastes surprisingly delicious with these classic pizza ingredients and it's worth giving it a try.

    I also have a tutorial for how to cook pizza on the grill if you're interested in an alternative cooking method.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    While the kimchi is the star ingredient, the other toppings are perfect on this 12" pizza: like the savory mushrooms, sweet red onions, and leafy baby spinach.

    • pizza dough ball - I like to use a premade dough ball. If it was frozen, thaw it in the fridge.
    • marinara sauce - Pick your favorite.
    • mozzarella cheese - The mild flavor works well with the kimchi.
    • baby spinach - Spinach has a mild, slightly sweet, and earthy flavor and it gets a bit wilty and crispy in the oven.
    • kimchi - Pick up a jar from the grocery store, farmers' market or check out how to make kimchi at home.
    • mushrooms - I use button mushrooms but you can also use cremini.
    • red onions - You can use yellow onions instead if desired.
    • crushed red pepper flakes - This is optional for if you like a little extra heat with your pizza.

    *See ingredient amounts in recipe card.

    Chef's Note: A nice garnish idea would be chopped green onions (scallions) because they are a versatile vegetable that add a bit of bite to the pizza without overpowering the other toppings.

    How to Make Kimchi Pizza

    Here are some tips and information on how to make and enjoy this flavor-packed fusion dish.

    1. Preheat oven. Preheat the oven to 450°F and lightly grease a pizza pan.
    2. Roll out pizza dough. Place the pizza dough ball on a lightly floured surface and roll it out into a thin circle. Transfer to the pizza pan. You can prick the dough all over with a fork or dough docker to avoid bubbles while baking.
    3. Pre-bake the crust. Pre-bake the crust for 5-6 minutes in the preheated oven, until it just becomes firm.
    4. Spread marinara. Spread the marinara sauce on the pizza dough circle, leaving the edges (crust) bare.
    5. Add toppings. Sprinkle the cheese on top of the sauce. Then arrange the spinach, kimchi, mushrooms and red onions evenly on top. I like placing the vegetables on top of the cheese so that they don't steam underneath and make the crust soggy.
    6. Finish baking. Return the pizza to the preheated oven and bake until the crust is golden and the cheese is fully melted, about 7 to 10 minutes.
    7. Serve. Let cool for 2 minutes before slicing. Sprinkle with crushed red pepper flakes (if using) and serve!
    Sliced kimchi pizza on circular wooden cutting board.

    Top Tip

    One of the most common problems with baking pizza dough is bubbles. Whether it is on the bottom or around the crust, it can distort your pizza and some people may not like the look of them. Large bubbles may even cause your toppings to slide.

    If you do not want bubbles on your kimchi pizza, take a fork or a dough punch roller (dough docker) and puncture holes in your pizza dough. After the dough is punctured, you are free to par-bake, add toppings and finish preparing your pizza.

    Recipe FAQs

    Is kimchi good on pizza?

    It's delicious! It might sound odd but it adds a hit of tangy, umami, spicy flavor to your pizza.

    How long can you store the leftovers?

    You can store leftover kimchi pizza in a covered container in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 days.

    A slice of kimchi pizza.

    More Delicious Kimchi Dishes to Try

    • Kimchi bacon fried rice on a plate on brown background.
      Kimchi Bacon Fried Rice
    • Kimchi in a bowl.
      28 of Our Best Kimchi Recipes
    • Kimchi pancakes stacked on top of each other.
      Kimchi Pancakes
    • Kimchi beef stew in Asian bowl.
      Easy Kimchi Beef Stew

    Do you like a thin or thick pizza crust? I like both but prefer a thin crust. If you tried this 🍕 Kimchi Pizza Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Sliced kimchi pizza on round serving board.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Kimchi Pizza

    This kimchi pizza recipe is a flavorful fusion of sour kimchi, savory vegetables and the classic pizza dough with melty cheese and marinara.
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine Italian, Korean
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 12 minutes minutes
    Total Time 22 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 slices
    Calories 213kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Pizza pan

    Ingredients

    • 1 premade pizza dough ball
    • ¾ cup marinara sauce
    • 2 cups mozzarella cheese shredded
    • ½ cup baby spinach shredded
    • 1 cup kimchi drained and chopped
    • ½ cup mushrooms cleaned and sliced
    • ¼ cup red onions sliced
    • crushed red pepper flakes to garnish (optional)
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 450°F and lightly grease a pizza pan.
    • Place the pizza dough ball on a lightly floured surface and roll it out into a thin circle. Transfer to the pizza pan. You can prick the dough all over with a fork or dough docker to avoid bubbles while baking.
      1 premade pizza dough ball
    • Pre-bake the crust for 5-6 minutes in the preheated oven, until it just becomes firm.
    • Spread the marinara sauce on the pizza dough circle, leaving the edges (crust) bare.
      ¾ cup marinara sauce
    • Sprinkle the cheese on top of the sauce. Then arrange the spinach, kimchi, mushrooms and red onions evenly on top.
      2 cups mozzarella cheese, ½ cup baby spinach, 1 cup kimchi, ½ cup mushrooms, ¼ cup red onions
    • Return the pizza to the preheated oven and bake until the crust is golden and the cheese is fully melted, about 7 to 10 minutes.
    • Let cool for 2 minutes before slicing. Sprinkle with crushed red pepper flakes (if using) and serve!

    Notes

    • These toppings have been measured out for a medium 12" pizza crust. You may need to adjust the topping amounts depending on the size of your pizza and personal preferences.
    • I like to use a premade dough ball. If it was frozen, thaw it in the fridge.
    • I like placing the vegetables on top of the cheese so that they don't steam underneath and make the crust soggy.
    • You can store leftover kimchi pizza in a covered container in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 days.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 213kcal | Carbohydrates: 26g | Protein: 11g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 22mg | Sodium: 651mg | Potassium: 134mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 465IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 148mg | Iron: 2mg

    Kimchi Tacos

    December 27, 2021 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    Bring the coastline into your kitchen with these fresh kimchi tacos with cod. The cod is coated with crispy Mexican-spiced breadcrumbs and each tortilla is topped with fresh ingredients such as guacamole, sour cream, edamame and of course--Korean kimchi! In just over 20 minutes, you can be enjoying these fresh, fusion tacos at home.

    Kimchi and cod tacos in a brown dish, edamame beans and chili peppers on the side.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    The vibrantly colored kimchi, vegetables and toppings make these tacos perfect for a celebratory dinner. Asian and Mexican flavors combine to make a fusion dish that's spicy, savory and comforting all at the same time just like these kimchi burritos, kimchi quesadillas and kimchi pizza. Serve these fish tacos on colorful plates for a restaurant-quality touch.

    You can serve fish tacos any time of year, but kimchi tacos go well with spring and summer celebrations. The fresh fish and vibrant colors make you feel like you're sitting on the beach.

    Lime wedges add a sharp citrus tang to the ingredients. If you're having a party, serve up some margaritas that enhance the citrus flavor. You can also turn it into a mini taco cups appetizer for a smaller bite.

    Ingredients

    Kimchi taco ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • kimchi - Store-bought or homemade kimchi both work great.
    • cod - Use fresh cod or thaw frozen cod in the fridge the night before.
    • edamame beans - You can find them canned or cook the shelled edamame beans from frozen. In Asian cuisine, kimchi and edamame frequently go together. Their sweet, firm but buttery texture balances kimchi's spice. Adding edamame to tacos boosts protein, texture, and authenticity.
    • flour tortillas - The 6" size works perfect for these kimchi tacos.
    • breadcrumbs - Use unseasoned breadcrumbs so we can add our own blend of spices.
    • fresh cilantro - This is an optional topping.
    • guacamole - Check out how to make delicious guacamole.
    • taco seasoning - You can also use Mexican spice blend which is very similar.

    *Check recipe card for full ingredients and amounts.

    Recipe Tweaks

    • Try Mexican crema. For extra authenticity, swap out the sour cream for Mexican crema. Like sour cream, the crema is rich, creamy and dairy-based but slightly thinner. Crema is also a bit more salty and sour with the addition of salt and lime juice.
    • Sour cream alternatives. Other sour cream alternatives include crème fraîche and plain yogurt. Just keep in mind that while the toppings look similar, they all have different tastes and textures.
    • Toppings. You can remove and add whatever toppings you choose, but remember that kimchi has a strong flavor and may not match with all of your typical taco toppings.

    How to Make Kimchi Tacos

    A small bowl of cracked eggs and a medium bowl with breadcrumbs., raw cod pieces on the side.

    Step 1: Beat the eggs in a small bowl.

    A small bowl of beaten eggs and a medium bowl with breadcrumbs.

    Step 2: Combine the bread crumbs, taco seasoning, oregano and salt in a separate bowl.

    Raw cod pieces dipped in a small bowl of eggs beaten and a bowl of breadcrumbs.

    Step 3: Fill a deep, heavy frying pan or wok with canola oil until it's ½" deep. Heat over medium heat. Dip the cod pieces into the egg and then gently roll them in the bread crumbs, making sure they are covered evenly.

    Breaded cod pieces in a frying pan with hot oil.

    Step 4: Once the oil is hot, carefully place the breaded cod in the pan. Fry until golden and crispy on both sides, about 2 minutes per side.

    Fried, breaded cod pieces on a paper towel.

    Step 5: Transfer them to a baking rack with paper towel underneath it.

    Kimchi and cod tacos stacked in a brown serving dish.

    Step 6: Top each tortilla with the cod, sour cream, guacamole, kimchi and edamame beans. Serve the kimchi tacos with fresh cilantro and lime wedges.

    Joss' Pro Tips

    Raw, breaded cod in a wooden dish.
    • Breading:
      • Pat the fish dry before cooking to achieve a crispy coating.
      • Shake off excess flour very well or the crust will have the tendency to fall off.
    • How to heat the tortillas (flour or corn):
      • Microwave - Stack the tortillas on a plate and cover with a damp paper towel. Microwave for 30 seconds at a time, until warm.
      • Oven - Preheat oven to 300°F. Stack the tortillas and wrap them in foil. Bake until heated through, about 15 to 20 minutes.
    • Frying: Fry in batches so that you don't crowd the pan--which lowers the heat of the oil.

    Kimchi Tacos FAQs

    How do you store leftover kimchi fish tacos?

    You are going to want to store the toppings separately. The cooked cod can be stored in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 days in an airtight container.

    What are Korean tacos made of?

    Korean tacos contain a staple of Korean food: kimchi. They also use your typical taco ingredients such as tortillas and vegetable toppings.

    Where did kimchi tacos come from?

    Originating in the bustling streets of Los Angeles, Korean kimchi tacos have a rich history as a popular street food phenomenon. These tasty creations showcase a fusion of Korean and Mexican flavors, featuring mouthwatering fillings artfully arranged on petite Mexican tortillas.

    Kimchi and cod soft tacos standing up in a brown dish.

    ❤️ Related Side Dishes to Consider

    • Tomatillo hot sauce in a small wooden bowl.
      Fast and Easy Tomatillo Hot Sauce
    • Cajun French fries in basket.
      How to Make Cajun Fries
    • Tomatillo salsa in a wooden bowl.
      How to Make Tomatillo Salsa
    • Grilled cubed mango on wooden skewers.
      Grilled Mango Skewers

    If you tried this 🌮 Kimchi Tacos Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Kimchi cod tacos in serving dish.
    Print Pin
    5 from 4 votes

    Kimchi Tacos

    Bring the coastline into your kitchen with these fresh kimchi soft tacos with cod. The cod is coated with crispy Mexican-spiced breadcrumbs and each tortilla is topped with fresh ingredients such as guacamole, sour cream, edamame and of course--Korean kimchi!
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine Korean, Mexican
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 8 minutes minutes
    Total Time 23 minutes minutes
    Servings 10 tacos
    Calories 302kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Frying pan

    Ingredients

    • 2 eggs
    • 1 cup plain bread crumbs
    • 1 tablespoon taco seasoning
    • 1 tablespoon dried oregano
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • 3 cups canola oil approximately--for frying
    • 1 pound cod fillets cut into 2" pieces
    • 10 flour tortillas 6"

    Toppings:

    • 1 cup frozen shelled edamame beans cooked
    • 1 cup kimchi chopped into smaller pieces
    • sour cream
    • guacamole
    • fresh cilantro chopped
    • lime wedges
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Beat the eggs in a small bowl.
      A small bowl of cracked eggs and a medium bowl with breadcrumbs., raw cod pieces on the side.
    • Combine the bread crumbs, taco seasoning, oregano and salt in a separate bowl.
      A small bowl of beaten eggs and a medium bowl with breadcrumbs.
    • Fill a deep, heavy frying pan or wok with canola oil until it's ½" deep. Heat over medium heat. Dip the cod pieces into the egg and then gently roll them in the bread crumbs, making sure they are covered evenly.
      Raw cod pieces dipped in a small bowl of eggs beaten and a bowl of breadcrumbs.
    • Once the oil is hot, carefully place the breaded cod in the pan. Fry until golden and crispy on both sides, about 2 minutes per side (fry in batches so that you don't crowd the pan). Transfer them to a baking rack with paper towel underneath it.
      Breaded cod pieces in a frying pan with hot oil.
    • Top each tortilla with the cod, sour cream, guacamole, kimchi and edamame beans. Serve with fresh cilantro and lime wedges.
      Kimchi and cod tacos in a brown dish, edamame beans in the background.

    Notes

    • Storage: Store toppings separately. The cooked cod can be stored in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 days in an airtight container.
    • Breading:
      • Pat the fish dry before cooking to achieve a crispy coating.
      • Shake off excess flour very well or the crust will have the tendency to fall off.
    • To heat the tortillas (optional):
      • Microwave - Stack the tortillas on a plate and cover with a damp paper towel. Microwave for 30 seconds at a time, until warm.
      • Oven - Preheat oven to 300°F. Stack the tortillas and wrap them in foil. Bake until heated through, about 15 to 20 minutes.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 302kcal | Carbohydrates: 25g | Protein: 15g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 52mg | Sodium: 459mg | Potassium: 340mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 98IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 82mg | Iron: 2mg

    Kimchi Slaw

    December 22, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 3 Comments

    This kimchi slaw with crab is a unique slaw recipe for its additional Asian ingredients that give it that extra crunch and tangy, umami-rich flavor. It's ready in about 15 minutes or less!

    Kimchi slaw in a bowl with sliced scallions and black sesame seeds on the side.

    Korean-American Slawesome Fusion

    Koreans enjoy barbecue as much as Americans do, but their methods and flavors are different. Koreans tend to use smaller cuts of meat and their BBQ sides consist of dishes like kimchi, rice and pickles. This slaw combines the best of both BBQ styles.

    The carrots and cabbage form a good, crunchy base in this kimchi salad while the crab meat adds a soft texture and savory taste. The creamy, cool mayo helps balance the sour kimchi, kimchi brine, and the bite from the sliced green onions.

    Featured Comment

    From Bob: ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ "I don't often comment on recipes but I am happy to do so here. This is my favorite slaw that I have ever made. We had this with gochujang pork chops and it was the perfect side dish. Wonderful texture and just loaded with flavor."

    I also make a kimchi tofu stir fry and kimchi potato salad that you might like.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What is Kimchi Slaw?

    Kimchi slaw is like regular coleslaw because of the mayo dressing and the various crunchy vegetables like shredded carrots and cabbage, but it has the addition of Korean kimchi (fermented vegetables) to make it a fusion dish, just like in this Korean kimchi pizza. Both slaws are also similar in their quick and easy preparation.

    Some other added ingredients not normally in basic coleslaw include sesame oil, green onions, black sesame seeds, and crab meat. Coleslaw is usually a vegetarian dish, but in this recipe I've included the crab as it goes well with kimchi. These ingredients add more flavor and kick.

    Ingredients

    • mayonnaise - For the creamy, slaw dressing.
    • soy sauce - I use soy sauce to season the slaw with rich flavor.
    • kimchi brine - This is the liquid in the jar of kimchi.
    • sesame oil - Make sure to use toasted sesame oil.
    • green cabbage - Check out how to shred cabbage for coleslaw here.
    • carrots - We are going to julienne the carrots, which is also known as the matchstick cut: thin stick-shape pieces.
    • imitation crab meat - You are looking for the flake style crab meat.
    • kimchi - If you can't find it in the grocery store, I have a recipe for Korean kimchi.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make Kimchi Slaw

    1. Make the slaw dressing. In a small bowl, combine the mayonnaise, soy sauce, kimchi brine and sesame oil. Reserve.
    2. Toss the veggies and crab together. In a large bowl, toss together the cabbage, carrots, crab meat and kimchi.
    3. Add dressing. Pour the dressing on top and toss to coat.
    4. Serve the kimchi slaw. Garnish with the black sesame seeds and green onions. Serve!
    Kimchi slaw in a bowl with sliced scallions and black sesame seeds.

    Joss' Top Tip

    Use a mandolin to shred the cabbage into thin pieces to make prep time a lot quicker and easier.

    Serving Suggestions

    Regular slaw is usually served as a side dish with barbecued meats like ribs, pulled pork, brisket, burgers or chicken. With kimchi slaw, you can do the same but with slightly different flavors.

    Since this slaw recipe has crab and other Asian ingredients, I recommend a sweet and/or spicy chicken dish (like in this Korean BBQ Chicken) because it is a mild meat that pairs well with crab; the slaw's sour and creamy taste will give your taste buds a break from the spice.

    If you wish to pair the slaw with a simpler meal, these kimchi hot dogs, tacos or pulled pork sandwiches are easy and delicious suggestions.

    Recipe FAQs

    How do you cut the cabbage for kimchi slaw?

    For this recipe, I use a mandolin to get nice and thin, uniform slices of cabbage. You can use a box grater if you prefer the extra, finely shredded cabbage.

    How do you store the leftovers?

    Keep leftovers refrigerated in a covered container for up to 3-5 days.

    Kimchi and crab slaw in a bowl with a fork.

    More Delicious Kimchi Recipes

    • Kimchi in a bowl.
      28 of Our Best Kimchi Recipes
    • Kimchi cod tacos in serving dish.
      Kimchi Tacos
    • Kimchi fries with cheese in baking dish.
      Kimchi Fries
    • Kimchi quesadillas on serving tray.
      Kimchi Quesadillas

    What did you think of this fusion coleslaw dish? If you tried this Kimchi Slaw Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Kimchi and crab slaw in bowl with green onions and black sesame seeds.
    Print Pin
    5 from 4 votes

    Kimchi Slaw

    This kimchi slaw with crab is a unique slaw recipe for its additional Asian ingredients that give it that extra crunch and tangy, umami flavor.
    Course Salad, Side Dish
    Cuisine American, Dutch, Korean
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Total Time 15 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 274kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    • ½ cup mayonnaise
    • ½ tablespoon soy sauce
    • ½ tablespoon kimchi brine the liquid in the jar of kimchi
    • ½ tablespoon sesame oil
    • 2 cups green cabbage shredded
    • 1 cup carrots julienned or shredded
    • 1 cup imitation crab meat (flake style) shredded
    • 1 cup kimchi drained and chopped
    • black sesame seeds to garnish
    • sliced green onions to garnish
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • In a small bowl, combine the mayonnaise, soy sauce, kimchi brine and sesame oil. Reserve.
      ½ cup mayonnaise, ½ tablespoon soy sauce, ½ tablespoon kimchi brine, ½ tablespoon sesame oil
    • In a large bowl, toss together the cabbage, carrots, crab meat and kimchi.
      2 cups green cabbage, 1 cup carrots, 1 cup imitation crab meat (flake style), 1 cup kimchi
    • Pour the dressing on top and toss to coat.
    • Garnish with the black sesame seeds and green onions. Serve!

    Notes

    • Slicing Tip: For this recipe, I use a mandolin to get nice and thin, uniform slices of cabbage. You can use a box grater if you prefer the extra, finely shredded cabbage.
    • Storage: Keep leftovers refrigerated in a covered container for up to 3-5 days.
    • Sides: Regular slaw is usually served as a side dish with barbecued meats like ribs, pulled pork, brisket, burgers, chicken or even tacos. With kimchi slaw, you can serve it the same way.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 274kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 13g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 17mg | Sodium: 585mg | Potassium: 172mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 5398IU | Vitamin C: 15mg | Calcium: 27mg | Iron: 1mg

    Christmas Morning Punch

    December 15, 2021 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    What better way to celebrate on Christmas morning than with this alcoholic Christmas morning punch? Bubbly ginger ale and sparkling wine pair with peach, orange, and mint flavors in this festive holiday drink--much like a mimosa but with some yummy, fruity additions.

    2 champagne glasses with Christmas punch, decorated with wooden snowflakes.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    🎄 A Joyous Start to Your Holiday Celebration

    Why an alcoholic beverage with brunch you ask? A mimosa (orange juice spiked with champagne) has become a popular brunch drink to continue the celebration from the night prior. It is a tradition in some cultures and families, though it might seem unusual to others.

    Besides that, Christmas Day is a rare opportunity to relax and enjoy a day off and this Christmas punch is a crowd favorite (just like my Shirley Temple party punch)!

    This festive Brandy Alexander drink and skillet mulled wine are also great for serving on Christmas day.

    🍑 Ingredients

    The base recipe makes 4 servings but you can easily scale it up in the recipe card depending on the size of your gathering.

    • canned sliced peaches - the kind that are canned in a light syrup
    • canned peach syrup - from the can of sliced peaches
    • orange juice - pulp or no pulp, whatever you like (my preference for this recipe is no pulp)
    • ginger ale - chilled
    • dry sparkling wine - Prosecco, cava or champagne - chilled
    • navel orange - thinly sliced
    • fresh mint leaves - to garnish (optional)

    *Check ingredient amounts in recipe card.

    Chef's Note: The frozen peaches act as ice cubes without watering down the punch! So there is a little tip for a punch that stays flavorful. Another flavorful, peach drink you might like is my iced peach green tea.

    🥄 How to Make Christmas Morning Punch

    Champagne pouring into a large glass pitcher with orange juice.

    With a little preparation beforehand, this punch recipe comes together quickly and is certain to please a crowd. This fruity cocktail is a perfect, light addition to your Christmas morning breakfast or brunch with your adult guests.

    1. Remove 1 cup of peach slices from the can/jar. Reserve 1 cup of the peach syrup.
    2. Place the peaches spaced apart on a wax paper lined baking sheet. Transfer to the freezer until the peaches are solid.
    3. Add the frozen peach slices, peach syrup and orange juice to a pitcher or punch bowl.
    4. Slowly pour the ginger ale in and then the sparkling wine. Give it a gentle mix.
    5. Add the orange slices and fresh mint leaves.
    6. Serve immediately!
    A large glass pitcher with Christmas punch and stirring stick.

    💭 Make Ahead Tips

    You will need to ensure that your sparkling wine and ginger ale are chilled. This can all be prepped the night before or within an hour of serving.

    You will also need to freeze your peach slices beforehand. They can be frozen the night before or even longer in advance (up to 6 months). If you choose to freeze them ahead, you can freeze them on the baking sheet first and then transfer them to a freezer bag and back into the freezer. This stops them from sticking together.

    Once these steps are taken, the recipe comes together beautifully in a pitcher or punch bowl for a fun and festive treat that is best served immediately.

    🍑 Speaking of freezing peaches, I have an easy and delicious recipe for peach freezer jam!

    👪 Serving Suggestions

    • You can also easily scale up the recipe depending on the gathering size. Double, triple or even quadruple the recipe if using a punch bowl for a larger number of guests, or hold it in a basic pitcher for a small gathering.
    • For guests that prefer to avoid alcohol, you can always prepare a second alternative, labeled pitcher with an increased ginger ale content and minus the champagne. This is also a great solution for kids that want to drink what the grown-ups are drinking.
    • Try adding some frozen cranberries to the glass as a garnish. They will enhance the festive quality of the punch with their deep red frosty hue.
    • This recipe is delicious alongside just about any breakfast food, whether you want to get fancy or keep it simple with pancakes, bacon, and eggs.
    • Serve it with this Christmas fruit cake.

    🌡️ Storage

    The prepared punch can be refrigerated for up to 3 to 5 days. Keep in mind that it will lose much of its carbonation by then.

    ❓ Christmas Morning Punch FAQs

    How long does punch stay carbonated?

    Once the fizzy has been poured into the punch bowl, it will start to lose its carbonation after 2 to 3 hours.

    How do you keep punch carbonated?

    It is best to pour the carbonated liquids into the punch right before serving it to your guests so that it lasts for at least a couple of hours while serving.

    How do you keep a punch cold at a party?

    Adding frozen fruit instead of ice cubes will help keep the punch chilled without watering it down.

    Christmas punch in 2 champagne glasses, with a wooden snowflake on each glass, a pitcher in the background.

    🎁 More Festive Holiday Recipes to Try

    • Coffee cake loaf with Christmas decorations.
      Christmas Coffee Cake
    • Cranberry white chocolate cake pops sprinkled with cinnamon in decorative jar.
      Cranberry White Chocolate Cake Pops
    • Roasted beets and turnips in wooden serving bowl.
      Christmas Side Dish: Roasted Beet & Turnip Duo
    • Mini caprese skewers arranged on plate with NYE decorations on the side.
      NYE Appetizer: Mini Caprese Skewers

    Did this holiday punch brighten your breakfast spread? If you tried this 🎄🥂 Christmas Morning Punch Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Christmas punch in champagne glasses with wooden snowflake decorations.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Christmas Morning Punch

    What better way to celebrate on Christmas morning than with this alcoholic Christmas morning punch? Bubbly ginger ale and sparkling wine pair with peach, orange, and mint flavors in this festive holiday drink.
    Course Drinks
    Cuisine American, French
    Diet Vegan, Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Freezing Time 30 minutes minutes
    Total Time 35 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 210kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    • 1 cup canned sliced peaches in light syrup
    • 1 cup canned peach syrup
    • 1 cup orange juice
    • 1 can ginger ale 12 ounces - chilled
    • 1 bottle dry sparkling wine 25 ounces - Prosecco, cava or champagne - chilled
    • 1 orange thinly sliced
    • fresh mint leaves to garnish
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Remove 1 cup of peach slices from the can/jar. Reserve 1 cup of the peach syrup.
    • Place the peaches spaced apart on a wax paper lined baking sheet. Transfer to the freezer until the peaches are solid.
    • Add the frozen peach slices, peach syrup and orange juice to a pitcher or punch bowl.
    • Slowly pour the ginger ale in and then the sparkling wine. Give it a gentle mix.
    • Add the orange slices and fresh mint leaves. Serve immediately!

    Notes

    • You can easily scale up this recipe depending on the size of your gathering.
    • The frozen peaches act as ice cubes without watering down the punch. They can be frozen well ahead of time (up to 6 months). If you choose to freeze them ahead, you can freeze them on the baking sheet first and then transfer them to a freezer bag and back into the freezer, so that they don't stick together.
    • You will need to ensure that your sparkling wine and ginger ale are chilled. This can all be prepped the night before or within an hour of serving.
    • The prepared punch can be refrigerated for up to 3 to 5 days. Keep in mind that it will lose much of its carbonation by then.
    • Once the fizzy has been poured into the punch bowl, it will start to lose its carbonation after 2 to 3 hours.
    • It is best to pour the carbonated liquids into the punch right before serving it to your guests so that it lasts for at least a couple of hours while serving.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 210kcal | Carbohydrates: 32g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 27mg | Potassium: 388mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 30g | Vitamin A: 410IU | Vitamin C: 37mg | Calcium: 33mg | Iron: 1mg

    Kimchi Fries

    December 13, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 14 Comments

    Your taste buds will get a delicious hit of fine Asian flavors in this fusion kimchi fries side dish. Crispy baked fries are covered in melted Emmental cheese, tangy kimchi, sesame seeds, green onions and a spicy kimchi sauce.

    Fries with kimchi and cheese in a casserole dish with a fork.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    🍟 What are Kimchi Fries?

    Kimchi fries are simply a Korean spin on plain cheese fries (much like my Korean grilled cheese recipe). The fries are topped with typical Asian ingredients such as kimchi, sesame seeds and sriracha, creating a cheesy, spicy, flavorful side dish or main.

    These spicy fries are quickly becoming a favorite comfort food of foodies and casual diners, just like many other fusion kimchi recipes, including my kimchi eggs and kimchi pizza.

    By adding kimchi, cheese, and other flavorings to oven-baked fries as outlined in this recipe, you will be able to recreate this tasty dish at home any time.

    Crazy Good

    Recipe Review From Sabrina: ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ "These are crazy good! I love the combination of crispy, melty, spicy and soft. Really good!"

    🥘 Ingredients

    Kimchi fries ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • French fries - Just use your favorite bag of pre-frozen fries from the supermarket.
    • olive oil cooking spray - You can substitute with canola oil cooking spray if needed.
    • paprika - Not pictured. For a little extra aroma/flavor and a more seasoned look.
    • kimchi - We will use the kimchi plus the brine from the jar so make sure not to throw out the juices.
    • Emmental cheese - Emmental cheese is a variation of Swiss cheese with pronounced nutty and fruity tones. It is great for melting and has a strong enough flavor to hold its own in this dish but won't overpower the other ingredients. If you can't get your hands on Emmental, a classic pizza cheese such as mozzarella will also work.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Chef's Note: Most of these ingredients are long-lasting products that you can keep on hand and bust out whenever the kimchi fries mood strikes. This recipe is also great for using up ingredients like green onions that are leftover from another Asian-inspired meal prepared earlier in the week.

    Need to Substitute an Ingredient?

    Ask AI for suggestions on how to substitute the particular ingredient.

    ChatGPT
    Google AI
    Grok

    🔪 How to Make Kimchi Fries

    Frozen fries on baking sheet with olive oil cooking spray.

    Step 1: Preheat Oven & Prep Fries. Preheat oven to 400°F. Spread out the fries out on a parchment-lined baking sheet. Spray them with olive oil or canola oil cooking spray.

    Fries with paprika on a baking sheet. Hands with gloves are handling the fries.

    Step 2: Season. Sprinkle the fries with the paprika and some salt. Mix them around to distribute the salt evenly.

    Fries in the oven on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper.

    Step 3: Bake. Bake in the preheated oven for about 20 minutes, until golden and crispy!

    Chef's Note: Keep an eye on the fries as they bake, as the time may vary depending on the type of fries used.

    Small bowls with creamy sriracha sauce, shredded cheese, kimchi and sliced scallions on light background.

    Step 4: Make the kimchi mayo sauce. While the fries are baking, mix the mayo with the kimchi brine and spicy sriracha sauce in a small bowl. If you don't like spicy food, leave out the sriracha.

    Fries in a casserole dish. Kimchi on the side in a small bowl.

    Step 5: Overlap the Fries. Transfer the baked fries to a casserole dish, overlapping the fries a little. (Or, you could choose to leave them on the pan, but bring them closer together so that the cheese melts over them like a poutine, not in between them.)

    Baked fries with kimchi and shredded cheese in a casserole dish.

    Step 6: Top With Cheese and Kimchi. Top the fries with the cheese and kimchi and bake them until the cheese is fully melted, 5 to 10 minutes.

    Fries with kimchi and cheese in a casserole dish. Sliced scallions on the side.

    Step 7: Add the Fresh Toppings. Top with the green onions, sesame seeds and sriracha mayonnaise.

    Fries with kimchi on a small plate. Lime wedges, sliced scallions and sriracha sauce on the side.

    Step 8: Serve. Serve the kimchi fries immediately and enjoy!

    💭 Joss' Top Tip

    The most essential ingredient to make this dish amazing is a quality batch of kimchi. You may attempt to create your own, but it is also worth spending the time perusing your neighborhood farmers' market and independent grocery stores for local products. There may be several vendors in your area that offer small-batch, quality kimchi.

    👪 Serving Size

    These kimchi fries work great as a snack on their own, or as a side to a larger meal. This recipe makes 4 side-dish servings.

    If you plan on eating it as a main, you will probably want to double the batch.

    ❓ Recipe FAQs

    What are the origins of kimchi fries?

    Originating in Austin, Texas by the Tex-Mex Korean BBQ fusion restaurant Chi'Lantro, kimchi fries have developed into a uniquely American pairing of cultural flavors. The restaurant began as a food truck business founded by Jae Kim in 2010. Jae created the kimchi fries and they have become a staple, being served over 200,000 times per year.

    How do you store the leftovers?

    Store leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.

    How do you reheat kimchi fries?

    Reheat in the microwave or in the oven at 350°F to retain crispiness.

    Fries with kimchi and cheese on a small plate. and in a casserole dish

    ❤️ More Delicious Kimchi Recipes

    • Kimchi and crab slaw in bowl with green onions and black sesame seeds.
      Kimchi Slaw
    • Kimchi bacon fried rice on a plate on brown background.
      Kimchi Bacon Fried Rice
    • Kimchi burritos cut open and stacked with toothpick.
      Kimchi Burritos
    • Kimchi shrimp stir fry in bowl on wooden background.
      Kimchi Shrimp Stir Fry

    If you tried this Kimchi Fries Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Kimchi fries with cheese in baking dish.
    Print Pin
    5 from 9 votes

    Kimchi Fries

    In this kimchi fries recipe, crispy baked fries are covered in melted Emmental cheese, tangy kimchi, sesame seeds, green onions and a spicy kimchi sauce. They are full of flavor and cheesy goodness.
    Course Main Course, Side Dish
    Cuisine American, Korean, Mexican
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 25 minutes minutes
    Total Time 35 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 526kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    For the Fries

    • 1 pound frozen fries
    • 1 teaspoon paprika
    • 3 tablespoons mayo
    • 1 tablespoon kimchi brine
    • 1 tablespoon sriracha sauce
    • 1 ½ cups Emmental cheese shredded (or mozzarella if you can't find Emmental)
    • ½ cup kimchi drained and chopped
    • salt to taste
    • olive oil cooking spray

    Toppings

    • 2 tablespoons green onions sliced
    • ½ teaspoon black sesame seeds
    • ½ teaspoon white sesame seeds
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 400°F and line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
    • Lay the fries out on the parchment-lined baking sheet in a single layer, making sure they aren't overlapping. Spray them with the olive oil.
      1 pound frozen fries
      Frozen fries on baking sheet with olive oil cooking spray.
    • Sprinkle the fries with the paprika and some salt. Mix them around.
      1 teaspoon paprika
      Frozen fries on a parchment-lined baking sheet.
    • Bake in the preheated oven for about 20 minutes, until golden and crispy. Keep an eye on them as the time may vary depending on the type of fries.
      Fries in the oven on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper.
    • While the fries are baking, mix the mayo with the kimchi brine and sriracha sauce in a small bowl (if you don't like it spicy, leave out the sriracha). Reserve.
      3 tablespoons mayo, 1 tablespoon kimchi brine, 1 tablespoon sriracha sauce
      Small bowls with creamy sriracha sauce, shredded cheese, kimchi and sliced scallions on light background.
    • Transfer the baked fries to a casserole dish, overlapping the fries a little. (Or you could choose to leave them on the pan, but bring them closer together and overlap them.)
      Fries in a casserole dish. Kimchi on the side in a small bowl.
    • Top the fries with the cheese and kimchi evenly. Bake for another 5 to 10 minutes, until the cheese is fully melted.
      1 ½ cups Emmental cheese, ½ cup kimchi
      Fries in a casserole dish, kimchi topping on the side.
    • Top with the green onions, sesame seeds and sriracha mayonnaise. Serve immediately.
      2 tablespoons green onions, ½ teaspoon black sesame seeds, ½ teaspoon white sesame seeds
      Baked fries with kimchi and cheese in a casserole dish.

    Notes

    • Serving size: This recipe yields 4 side dish portions. If you plan on eating these fries as a main, it makes 2 servings.
    • Kimchi amount: If you love the kimchi, feel free to add more!
    • Fridge storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
    • Reheating: Reheat in the microwave or in the oven at 350°F to retain crispiness.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 526kcal | Carbohydrates: 37g | Protein: 14g | Fat: 36g | Saturated Fat: 14g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 42mg | Sodium: 787mg | Potassium: 548mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 624IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 340mg | Iron: 2mg

    Christmas Fruit Salad

    December 8, 2021 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    This Christmas fruit salad is a fresh, sweet treat for a morning snack, dessert after dinner or brunch during the holidays. Keeping the colors of Christmas, the mixed fruit give different layers of sweetness, from the fragrant strawberries to the tart green apple.

    Fruit salad with whipped cream and mint in dessert glasses.

    The acidic kiwi and orange juice bring it together while the honey and whipped cream lighten and sweeten the salad and give it that finishing Christmas holiday-style touch.

    This holiday salad is sure to give family and guests the Christmas feels. Easy to prepare and customizable, it's a dessert that brings both nostalgia and holiday cheer. I hope it becomes a part of your holiday tradition.

    Be sure to check out more of my festive Christmas recipes like this red and white Christmas side dish of roasted veggies and easy Christmas morning punch.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Fruit salad ingredients on wooden board with Christmas decorations.
    • green apples - cleaned, cored and chopped (can leave the peel on)
    • kiwis - peeled and chopped
    • strawberries - hulled and quartered (small strawberries can just be halved)
    • liquid honey - to enhance the sweetness of the fruits and balance the acidity of the fruits that are more tart
    • orange juice - freshly squeezed
    • whipped cream topping - for serving (such as Cool Whip)
    • fresh mint leaves - to garnish (optional)

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Recipe Tweaks

    • If you wish to add more fruit that matches the Christmas colors, the fruits that best pair with the ones in this fruity Christmas salad are cranberries, red apples or cherries. Pitted cherries taste amazing in fresh fruit salads and baking, including my cherry galette.
    • There are two green fruits in the salad already, so it makes sense to add a red fruit to balance the colors but a green fruit suggestion for you would be green grapes. A ripe starfruit is slightly green at the edges and would go beautifully with the Christmas theme.
    • You can even add some white fruits if you wish.
    • For some extra crunch, sweetness and Christmas colors, crumble these easy Christmas cookies over the top of the fruit salad.

    Red Fruits

    • cranberries
    • red apples
    • cherries
    • raspberries

    Green Fruits

    • green grapes
    • honeydew melon
    • starfruit
    • pear

    White Fruits

    • white dragon fruit
    • banana
    • white currants
    • coconut

    If you would like to get more adventurous, you can add warm holiday spices like cinnamon and nutmeg, basil for a strong, peppery flavor or spinach for more iron and more green for the holidays. Warm Christmas spices aren't limited to desserts like these Christmas-spiced cake pops. Think outside the box.

    How to Make Christmas Fruit Salad

    This recipe makes 4 servings but it can easily be scaled up for more guests.

    Fruit salad in white bowl on wooden board.

    Step 1: Combine Fruit. In a large glass bowl, combine all of the fruit.

    Honey and orange juice in small glass bowl.

    Step 2: Whisk Juice. Whisk together the honey and orange juice in a separate small bowl.

    Fruit salad and orange juice in bowls.

    Step 3: Drizzle. Drizzle it over the fruit salad.

    Fruit salad in white bowl with a spoon.

    Step 4: Toss. Toss the fruit with the juice to combine.

    Fruit salad with whipped cream and mint in dessert glasses on brown background.

    Step 5: Serve. Transfer the Christmas fruit salad to individual bowls. Top with the whipped cream topping and fresh mint leaves (if using). Serve!

    Chef's Note: You can also serve it buffet-style and let guests serve themselves and customize their portions.

    Food & Drink Pairings

    • Roast meats: Serve it alongside whole roasted chicken, turkey or ham as a refreshing, light side dish that contrasts with the richness of the meat. You can also try this Christmas beef tenderloin.
    • Holiday desserts: Pair it with Christmas desserts like easy Xmas fruit cake, gingerbread cake pops, or mince pies.
    • Brunch items: It complements brunch staples like cinnamon rolls, pancakes, or quiche.
    • Cheese platters: Fruit salad goes well with a selection of cheeses like brie, cheddar, or gouda.
    • Drinks: The cool and fruity salad is a nice temperature contrast to warm or spiced holiday drinks like eggnog, hot chocolate or this hot, spiced mulled wine cocktail.

    Storage Tips

    Like with most fresh fruit, it is recommended to eat them as soon as they are prepared. If certain fruits are left out for a long period of time, they start to brown (like apples) or get squishy (like grapes). This is where orange juice comes in; it adds a fresh flavor to the fruit salad and the acid helps prevent browning.

    Fruit salads usually last up to three to five days. If you still have leftovers and want to have your salad in the morning or after dinner, store it in an airtight container as soon as possible.

    If you wish to take it to-go, reusable silicone bags are great for individual portions and keep your salad fresh.

    Christmas Fruit Salad FAQs

    What fruits are associated with Christmas?

    Cranberries, apples and mandarin oranges are very commonly associated with Christmas. Some others include dates, pears, pomegranates, currants, raisins, figs and prunes.

    Can you cut up the fruit for a fruit salad the night before?

    While it's best to prepare the fruits on the day of for your guests, you might be able to get away with cutting it up the night before as long as you toss the fruit with the orange juice mixture and cover it well in the fridge.

    Fruit salad with whipped cream and mint leaves in dessert bowls.

    More Festive Holiday Recipes to Try

    • Goat cheese shots with mini breadsticks and Christmas lights on the side.
      Cranberry Goat Cheese Mini Dips (Christmas Appetizer)
    • Cranberry biscotti scattered on baking rack.
      Cranberry Biscotti
    • Coffee cake loaf with Christmas decorations.
      Christmas Coffee Cake
    • Canadian butter tarts on Christmas themed plate.
      Canadian Butter Tarts

    If you tried this Christmas Fruit Salad Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Fruit salad in dessert glass.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Christmas Fruit Salad

    This Christmas-themed fruit salad is a fresh, sweet treat for brunch, a morning snack or after-dinner dessert during the holidays.
    Course Breakfast, Dessert, Salad, Snack
    Cuisine American
    Diet Low Salt, Vegetarian
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 109kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    • 2 cups green apples cleaned, cored and chopped (can leave the peel on)
    • 2 kiwis peeled and chopped
    • 2 cups strawberries hulled and quartered (small strawberries can be halved)
    • 2 tablespoons liquid honey
    • 2 tablespoons orange juice freshly squeezed
    • whipped cream topping for serving
    • fresh mint leaves to garnish (optional)
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • In a large glass bowl, combine all of the fruit.
      Fruit salad in white bowl on wooden board.
    • Whisk together the honey and orange juice in a separate small bowl.
      Honey and orange juice in small glass bowl.
    • Drizzle it over the fruit salad. Toss to combine.
      Fruit salad and orange juice in bowls.
    • Transfer to individual bowls. Serve with the whipped cream topping and fresh mint leaves (if using).
      Fruit salad in clear glass bowls with forks on the side.

    Notes

    • You can also serve it buffet-style and let guests serve themselves and customize their portions.
    • It's best to prepare and chop the fruits on the day of serving for your guests. If certain fruits are left out for a long period of time, they start to brown (like apples) or get squishy.
    • This salad can be stored in the refrigerator for up to 3 to 5 days in an airtight container.
    • This recipe can easily be scaled up for more guests.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 109kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 3mg | Potassium: 338mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 21g | Vitamin A: 97IU | Vitamin C: 91mg | Calcium: 32mg | Iron: 1mg

    Homemade Brown Gravy Recipe

    December 6, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 2 Comments

    Add rich, savory flavor to your favorite dishes with this homemade, brown gravy recipe from scratch. No need to prepare your meat first--this easy recipe shows you how to make brown gravy without drippings, in only 10 minutes. Pour the sauce in a gravy boat, and let your guests serve themselves when they arrive for a sit-down dinner.

    Brown gravy in a gravy warmer on wooden background.

    This delicious and easy, brown gravy is ideal with roasted meats like turkey, chicken (try it on this roasted chicken and potatoes), beef, and pork. Sure, you can buy gravy, but homemade offers better control over ingredients and flavors.

    It's also commonly served with mashed potatoes, stuffing, or vegetables. I have an easy tutorial showing how to make stuffing in the oven that would taste amazing with this gravy.

    It can even be adapted for vegetarian versions using mushroom broth. For more savory gravy recipes, try my tomato gravy, gravy for ham and sawmill sausage gravy.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Homemade Brown Gravy Ingredients

    Homemade brown gravy ingredients labeled.
    • butter and all-purpose flour - to make a roux
    • beef broth - I buy prepared beef broth (you could also use bison broth)
    • dry sherry - this is optional to add depth and complexity to the homemade brown gravy
    • fresh herbs - if desired (such as thyme, rosemary, parsley and oregano)

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make Brown Gravy

    Butter melting in frying pan.

    Step 1: Melt Butter. Melt butter in a non-stick skillet or saucepan over medium heat.

    Flour and butter mixture in frying pan.

    Step 2: Add Flour. Stir in the flour.

    Roux in frying pan.

    Step 3: Cook. Cook until the mixture is golden-brown in color (about 5 to 7 minutes), stirring constantly.

    Chef's Note: You want the roux to bubble gently. If it is bubbling too vigorously, turn the heat down to medium-low.

    Broth and roux in frying pan.

    Step 4: Add Broth. Slowly whisk in the broth, about ¼ cup at a time, until smooth. Bring to a simmer.

    Brown gravy in frying pan.

    Step 5: Simmer. Lower the heat to medium-low and simmer until thickened, about 2 to 3 minutes, stirring occasionally.

    Brown gravy in frying pan with dry sherry.

    Step 6: Add Sherry (Optional). Stir in dry sherry, if using.

    Brown gravy in frying pan with a wooden spoon and salt sprinkling on top.

    Step 7: Season. Season with salt and pepper, to taste. Add some fresh herbs, if desired.

    Brown gravy in frying pan on wooden background, gravy warmer in the background.

    Step 8: Serve. Serve the homemade brown gravy!

    Serving Suggestions

    Gravy dripping over plate of meatloaf and broccoli, gravy warmer in the background.

    This gravy adds a hearty, rustic flavor with a subtle beef aftertaste to homemade dishes. Drizzle gravy over pot roast, steak, meatloaf, mashed potatoes, vegetables and roasted chicken or turkey for added color, flavor and deliciousness.

    While you can enjoy gravy any time of the year, its warm, comforting aroma makes it best for autumn roasts and holiday meals.

    Tips for Perfect Brown Gravy

    • Stir Consistently: Prevents lumps and ensures a smooth texture.
    • Use a Strainer: If it's still lumpy, strain it through a fine-mesh sieve to remove the lumps.
    • Add Liquid Gradually: Add the broth slowly while stirring to achieve the best consistency.
    • Taste and Adjust: Regularly taste and adjust the seasoning for a balanced flavor.

    Can you Freeze Gravy?

    Yes, you can freeze gravy for up to four to six months in the freezer. Store it in airtight containers or freezer bags, or freeze portions in ice cube trays so you don't have to thaw the whole container every time.

    Fridge Storage & Reheating

    You can also store your leftover gravy in the fridge. It can last up to 4 days in the fridge in an airtight container, so eat quickly or send it to the freezer.

    Reheat it on the stove over medium heat. Whisk in some extra broth if it has thickened too much.

    How to Use Up Leftovers

    If you store the gravy in the fridge, find creative ways to use the whole container up before it goes bad. It can be one of the most versatile ingredients in your kitchen:

    • Simmer meat and vegetables in a pan with gravy.
    • Add gravy to soup to thicken up the broth and enhance the flavor.
    • Gravy on toast makes a quick, savory breakfast or snack.
    • For a Cajun-style meal, pour gravy on cooked rice.
    • Make poutine!
    Brown gravy in a gravy warmer on wooden background.

    Related Dishes to Serve With Gravy

    • Brown rice in bowl with mushrooms.
      How to Cook Brown Rice on the Stove
    • Electric skillet pot roast with vegetables on serving tray.
      Electric Skillet Pot Roast
    • Pierogies with cheese filling on blue plate.
      Easy Pierogies
    • Toad in the hole in casserole dish.
      British Toad in the Hole Recipe

    If you tried this Homemade Brown Gravy Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Brown gravy in gravy dish with fresh herbs.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Homemade Brown Gravy Recipe

    Add rich, savory flavor to your favorite dishes with homemade, brown gravy from scratch in only 10 minutes. Pour the sauce in a gravy boat, and let your guests serve themselves when they arrive for a sit-down dinner.
    Course Sauce
    Cuisine American, British
    Prep Time 3 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 7 minutes minutes
    Total Time 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 6 ⅓ cup servings
    Calories 94kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    • ¼ cup butter
    • ¼ cup all-purpose flour
    • 2 cups beef broth
    • 1-2 tablespoons dry sherry optional
    • salt and pepper to taste
    • fresh herbs minced - optional
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Melt butter in a non-stick skillet or saucepan over medium heat. Stir in the flour.
      ¼ cup butter, ¼ cup all-purpose flour
      Butter melting in frying pan.
    • Cook until the mixture is golden brown in color (about 5 to 7 minutes), stirring constantly. (You want it to bubble gently. If it is bubbling too vigorously, turn the heat down to medium-low.)
      Roux in frying pan.
    • Slowly whisk in the broth, about ¼ cup at a time, until smooth. Bring to a simmer.
      2 cups beef broth
      Broth and roux in frying pan.
    • Lower the heat to medium-low and simmer until thickened, about 2 to 3 minutes, stirring occasionally.
      Brown gravy in frying pan.
    • Stir in dry sherry, if using. Season with salt and pepper, to taste. Add some fresh herbs, if desired.
      1-2 tablespoons dry sherry
      Brown gravy in frying pan.
    • Serve!
      Brown gravy in frying pan on wooden background, gravy warmer in the background.

    Notes

    • Fridge Storage: You can store your leftover brown gravy in the fridge. It can last up to 4 days in the fridge in an airtight container, so eat quickly or send it to the freezer.
    • Freezer Storage: You can also freeze gravy for up to four to six months in the freezer. Store it in airtight containers or freezer bags, or freeze portions in ice cube trays so you don't have to thaw the whole container every time.
    • Reheating: Reheat on the stove over medium heat. Whisk in some extra broth if it has thickened too much.
    • Tips:
      • Stir Consistently: Prevents lumps and ensures a smooth texture.
        Add Liquid Gradually: Add the broth slowly while stirring to achieve the best consistency.
      • Taste and Adjust: Regularly taste and adjust the seasoning for a balanced flavor.
      • Use a Strainer: If it's still lumpy, strain it through a fine-mesh sieve to remove the lumps.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 94kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 20mg | Sodium: 365mg | Potassium: 53mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 236IU | Calcium: 8mg | Iron: 1mg

    Christmas Wreath Salad

    December 1, 2021 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    Delight your holiday guests with this stunning, red, white and green, Christmas wreath salad for dinner. This easy and quick recipe offers a refreshing salad in the shape of a wreath so your guests can serve themselves while they admire your artistic flair.

    Christmas wreath salad on a large serving plate, white candles on the side.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    A Festive & Delicious Holiday Salad

    Resembling a traditional Christmas wreath with greens as the base, the pecans represent the pine cones, the pomegranate seeds the lights and the goat cheese appears to look like snow.

    A reddish-orange pomegranate vinaigrette adds a dash of red and contrasts with the green salad, completing the Christmas look. Serve this salad on a holiday plate for an extra festive touch.

    When you serve dinner on Christmas Eve, main courses such as juicy roasted chicken or hearty bison chuck roast need light, refreshing courses on the side and this salad is just that.

    Start with this Christmas salad made from fruit, nuts, lettuce and cheese that whets your guests' appetites without making them full before the main event. Plus, a vegetable dish gives your guests a little nutrition before they move on to other courses.

    You can check out more of my holiday recipes for your Christmas menu here.

    Ingredients

    Christmas wreath salad ingredients labeled.
    • pomegranates - you will need pomegranate juice for the vinaigrette and pomegranate seeds for the salad
    • sugar - to sweeten the vinaigrette (can substitute with honey or agave nectar if desired)
    • canola oil - for the vinaigrette
    • lemon and orange juice - for the vinaigrette (freshly squeezed)
    • mixed salad greens - can be a mix of baby lettuces, Swiss chard, mustard greens, arugula, spinach etc.
    • goat cheese - crumbled
    • toasted pecans - for some nuttiness and crunch

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make a Christmas Wreath Salad

    It only takes about 10 minutes to whip up this elegant holiday salad. Here are the steps:

    Pomegranate dressing in a small bowl with a whisk and lemon juicer over top.

    Step 1: Whisk. In a medium bowl, whisk together the pomegranate juice, orange juice, lemon juice and sugar.

    Pomegranate dressing in a small bowl with a whisk.

    Step 2: Drizzle. Slowly drizzle the canola oil into the mixture while constantly whisking so that it combines well. Season with salt and pepper. Reserve.

    Greens getting placed on a white serving plate.

    Step 3: Assemble. On a large serving plate, place a small circular serving dish in the middle (it will hold the vinaigrette). Scatter the mixed greens around the small serving dish in the shape of a wreath.

    Greens on a serving plate in the shape of a wreath with pomegranate seeds and goat cheese.

    Step 4: Add Toppings. Top the greens evenly with the crumbled goat cheese, toasted pecans and pomegranate seeds.

    Chef's Note: Depending on the size of your serving plate, you may have to adjust the topping amounts slightly.

    Christmas wreath salad on a large serving plate, white candles on the side.

    Step 6: Serve. Pour the vinaigrette into the small serving dish in the center of the Christmas wreath salad. Serve!

    Serving Suggestions

    • You could drizzle the vinaigrette over the Christmas dinner salad, but placing it in a serving dish helps the salad hold its "wreath" shape and prevents the lettuce from getting soggy.
    • The vinaigrette holds up well in the fridge so you can use it for leftover salads and other dishes.
    • If you have vegetarian guests coming over, this dish allows them to take part in the festivities. Remove the cheese to the side to provide a dish for vegans.
    • Serve it with these Christmas-inspired main dishes: beef tenderloin with bourbon mushroom sauce or skillet pork tenderloin with white wine sauce.
    • As for drinks, this pomegranate mojito mocktail complements the salad nicely. This Brandy Alexander drink combines the sweetness of chocolate liqueur with fresh cream in a martini glass, creating a comforting, winter holiday drink.

    Make Ahead Tips

    • For the Christmas wreath salad: Although this salad is easy to assemble in a pinch, the individual salad ingredients can be prepped a day in advance--throw it together before your guests arrive (without the vinaigrette), then stick it in the fridge until you're ready to eat. Cover the salad with plastic or place it in a container to preserve the freshness.
    • For the vinaigrette: The Christmas salad dressing can be made in advance as it stores in the fridge for up to one to two weeks. Make sure to shake it well before pouring it into the serving dish.
    Christmas salad on a large serving plate with pomegranate dressing drizzling over.

    More Holiday Recipes to Consider

    • Brown gravy in gravy dish with fresh herbs.
      Homemade Brown Gravy Recipe
    • Roasted beets and turnips in wooden serving bowl.
      Christmas Side Dish: Roasted Beet & Turnip Duo
    • Christmas cookies on serving tray.
      Easy Homemade Christmas Cookies
    • Salmon and dill mousse with caviar in white dish.
      Salmon Mousse

    If you tried this Christmas Wreath Salad Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Christmas wreath salad on white background.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Christmas Wreath Salad

    Delight your holiday guests with this stunning, red, white and green, Christmas wreath salad for dinner that comes together quick and easy. A reddish-orange pomegranate vinaigrette completes the Christmas look.
    Course Salad
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 224kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    For the Pomegranate Vinaigrette

    • ½ cup pomegranate juice
    • 2 tablespoons orange juice freshly squeezed
    • 1 tablespoon lemon juice freshly squeezed--or to taste
    • 2 tablespoons sugar
    • ½ cup canola oil
    • salt and pepper to taste

    For the Salad

    • 6 cups mixed salad greens
    • ¾ cup goat cheese crumbled
    • ½ cup pecans toasted
    • ½ cup pomegranate seeds
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    For the Pomegranate Vinaigrette

    • In a medium bowl, whisk together the pomegranate juice, orange juice, lemon juice and sugar.
      Pomegranate dressing in a small bowl with a whisk.
    • Slowly drizzle the canola oil into the mixture while constantly whisking so that it combines well. Season with salt and pepper. Reserve.
      Pomegranate dressing in a small bowl with a whisk and lemon juicer over top.

    To Assemble the Salad

    • On a large serving plate, place a small circular serving dish in the middle (it will hold the vinaigrette). Scatter the mixed greens around the small serving dish in the shape of a wreath.
      Greens getting placed on a white serving plate.
    • Top the greens evenly with the crumbled goat cheese, toasted pecans and pomegranate seeds.
      Greens on a serving plate in the shape of a wreath with pomegranate seeds and goat cheese.
    • Pour the vinaigrette into the small serving dish in the center. Serve!
      Christmas wreath salad on a large serving plate, white candles in the background.

    Notes

    • Nutrition information does not include the vinaigrette. Each tablespoon has approximately 60 calories and 5 grams fat.
    • Depending on the size of your serving plate, you may have to adjust the topping amounts slightly.
    • The vinaigrette can be made in advance as it stores in the fridge for up to one to two weeks. Make sure to shake it well before pouring it into the serving dish.
    • If you have vegetarian guests coming over, this dish allows them to take part in the festivities. Remove the cheese to the side to provide a dish for vegans.
    • Although this salad is easy to assemble in a pinch, the individual salad ingredients can be prepped a day in advance--throw it together before your guests arrive (without the vinaigrette), then stick it in the fridge until you're ready to eat. Cover the salad with plastic or place it in a container to preserve the freshness.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 224kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 20mg | Sodium: 173mg | Potassium: 213mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1128IU | Vitamin C: 16mg | Calcium: 78mg | Iron: 2mg

    Kimchi Grilled Cheese Sandwiches

    November 29, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    Consider this recipe for kimchi grilled cheese sandwiches: an interesting and new Korean spin on a classic comfort food. This simple recipe can be ready in about ten minutes and it's loaded with flavor and texture!

    Kimchi grilled cheese sandwiches on a brown plate with kimchi on the side.

    Korean kimchi is infinitely versatile and packed with flavor, elevating the classic skillet grilled cheese.

    Cut the sandwich in half for easier handling and to showcase the melted cheese and kimchi filling. Serve hot, maybe with a side of dipping sauce like this kimchi mayo or extra kimchi on the side for a complete meal.

    If you're looking for new favorite sandwiches, I think you'll also like my cold cut trio sub sandwich and grilled peanut butter and jelly sandwich.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    🧀 Ingredients

    Kimchi grilled cheese sandwich ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • cheddar cheese - For best results, buy a block of cheddar cheese and grate it yourself for improved freshness and texture.
    • kimchi - Drain your kimchi well to avoid a soggy sandwich. You can find vegan kimchi as well, so no need to miss out on this delicious sandwich if you follow a vegan or vegetarian diet. Check out how to make fermented kimchi at home.
    • multigrain bread - Or just use what you have on hand. A fresh loaf of rustic sourdough bread would also add a nice touch, enabling you to achieve perfectly crunchy, toasted bread slices.
    • sriracha sauce - Optional, if you like spicy food.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    📖 Recipe Tweaks

    • Spice it up. You might consider adding spices to the mix, such as basil and chives, for a new dimension of flavor.
    • Veganize it. It could even be made vegan by substituting plant based butter, mayo, and cheddar style shreds.
    • Load it. Load up the filling with your favorite grilled cheese additions that work with kimchi like tomato slices, gochujang, spinach, bacon and avocado.

    🔪 How to Make Kimchi Grilled Cheese Sandwiches

    Kimchi grilled cheese filling in a bowl with sriracha mayo on the side.

    Step 1. Combine filling. In a medium bowl, combine the cheese, kimchi and green onions. In a separate, small bowl, combine the mayo and sriracha.

    4 slices of bread with butter on cutting board.

    Step 2. Butter bread. Butter one side of each bread slice.

    Chef's Note: As with all grilled cheese sandwiches, the buttered side should be on the outside. It might feel a little inside out but it's necessary for golden crispiness, moisture and flavor as you're frying the sandwiches.

    Bread slices with butter and kimchi cheese filling on cutting board.

    Step 3. Add filling. Spread the other side of 2 bread slices with the mayo. Top the mayo side with half of the cheese mixture on each.

    Uncooked kimchi grilled cheese sandwiches with butter on the outside.

    Step 4. Close the sandwich. Top with the remaining bread slices.

    Kimchi grilled cheese sandwich in pan.

    Step 5. Fry. Place the sandwiches in a skillet over medium-low heat (so as not to burn the bread), cover with a lid and cook until golden brown on the bottom. Flip them over and cook uncovered for another 3 to 5 minutes, until golden brown and cheese is fully melted.

    Kimchi grilled cheese sandwiches on a brown plate with kimchi, spicy mayo and green onions on the side.

    Step 6. Serve. Slice the sandwiches in half and serve with extra mayo and sriracha on the side, if desired.

    Chef's Note: Using the lid during the first half of frying helps the cheese to melt. Leaving it off in the second half ensures crispy bread.

    🥗 Serving Suggestions

    • Mayo and sriracha make excellent dipping options for your kimchi grilled cheese sandwich.
    • Or you can go the more traditional route by serving it with a bowl of classic roasted garlic tomato soup; try it with a tomato gravy for a thicker option.
    • Cold soups like this tomato & watermelon gazpacho soup are also nice.
    • Looking for a green option? Try my cucumber kimchi salad.

    ❓ Recipe FAQs

    How long do leftovers last?

    This recipe is best served immediately, so be sure to share with friends or family and avoid leftovers. If you do happen to have some leftovers though, store in the fridge for up to 3 days.

    How do you reheat leftover sandwiches?

    Reheat them in a frying pan over medium heat or in a 350°F oven to retain the crispiness. You can add a touch of butter to the pan if desired.

    Is it vegetarian?

    Kimchi can be vegetarian or not, depending on the ingredients, so check over the label carefully to be sure. Otherwise, this sandwich is vegetarian.

    Kimchi grilled cheese sandwiches stacked on a brown plate with skewer.

    ❤️ More Delicious Kimchi Recipes You Will Love

    • Kimchi fries with cheese in baking dish.
      Kimchi Fries
    • Kimchi in a bowl.
      28 of Our Best Kimchi Recipes
    • Kimchi hot dogs with small bowls of toppings on serving tray.
      Kimchi Hot Dogs
    • Kimchi dumplings arranged on plate with dipping sauce.
      Kimchi Dumplings

    If you tried this 🥪 Kimchi Grilled Cheese Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Kimchi grilled cheese sandwiches stacked on serving tray with skewer.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Kimchi Grilled Cheese Sandwiches

    Consider this recipe for kimchi grilled cheese sandwiches: an interesting new spin on a classic comfort food. This simple recipe can be ready in about ten minutes, but will provide an elevated flavor profile to the classic sandwich.
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American, Korean
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 6 minutes minutes
    Total Time 11 minutes minutes
    Servings 2 sandwiches
    Calories 578kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Large frying pan

    Ingredients

    • 1 cup cheddar cheese grated
    • ½ cup kimchi drained and chopped
    • 2 tablespoons fresh green onions sliced
    • 2 tablespoons mayo
    • ½ tablespoon sriracha sauce optional
    • 2 tablespoons butter softened
    • 4 slices multigrain bread or your favorite kind
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • In a medium bowl, combine the cheese, kimchi and green onions. In a separate, small bowl, combine the mayo and sriracha.
      1 cup cheddar cheese, ½ cup kimchi, 2 tablespoons fresh green onions, 2 tablespoons mayo, ½ tablespoon sriracha sauce
    • Butter one side of each slice of bread.
      2 tablespoons butter, 4 slices multigrain bread
    • Spread the other side of 2 bread slices (not the buttered side) with the sriracha mayo. Top each with half of the cheese mixture. Top with the remaining bread slices (the buttered sides should be on the outside).
    • Heat a large skillet to medium-low heat. Place the sandwiches in the skillet, cover with a lid and cook until golden brown on the bottom, about 3-5 minutes.
    • Flip them over and cook uncovered for another 3 to 5 minutes, until golden brown and cheese is fully melted.
    • Slice the sandwiches in half and serve with extra mayo and sriracha on the side, if desired.

    Notes

    • Storage and reheating: This recipe is best served immediately. If you do happen to have some leftovers though, store in the fridge for up to 3 days and reheat them in the pan over medium heat to retain the crispiness.
    • Tip: Drain your kimchi well to avoid a soggy sandwich.
    • Serving suggestions: Cut the sandwich in half for easier handling and to showcase the melted cheese and kimchi filling. Serve hot, maybe with a side of dipping sauce like this kimchi mayo or extra kimchi on the side for a complete meal.
    • Vegan option: It could even be made vegan by substituting plant based butter, mayo, and cheddar style shreds.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 578kcal | Carbohydrates: 25g | Protein: 22g | Fat: 44g | Saturated Fat: 22g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 12g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 97mg | Sodium: 874mg | Potassium: 247mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1100IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 483mg | Iron: 2mg

    Cranberry Biscotti

    November 24, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 4 Comments

    Serve your afternoon tea with this fresh, homemade cranberry biscotti. The hard, crunchy biscuit absorbs the flavor and warmth of the tea, accentuating the orange zest and dried cranberries. Whole almonds add the perfect crunch to your biscotti.

    Cranberry biscotti laid out on baking rack.

    The cranberry-orange flavor in this Italian biscotti is perfect for the holidays, including Thanksgiving and Christmas, but you can enjoy it year round if you wish.

    For more cranberry holiday recipes to serve, you can try these easy cranberry goat cheese shots and cranberry cake pops.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What is Cranberry Biscotti?

    Biscotti is an Italian hard biscuit, also known as cantucci. The word Biscotti comes from the Latin word "biscoctus" meaning twice-baked. Baking them twice gives them that crunchy texture throughout and on all sides.

    This version includes cranberries, orange zest and almonds as add-ins.

    Ingredients

    Cranberry biscotti ingredients labeled.
    • superfine sugar - Also called caster sugar.
    • canola oil - Or vegetable oil.
    • eggs - I use large eggs.
    • orange extract - Look for pure orange extract. It will add nice, citrus flavor that can withstand the heat from baking.
    • orange zest - Freshly grated from oranges such as navel.
    • dried cranberries - You can use regular dried cranberries or orange-flavored dried cranberries if you can find them.
    • almonds - I use whole almonds in this recipe.
    • flour - All purpose white flour.
    • egg - Whisked in a small bowl to brush the cranberry biscotti with.

    *See recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Chef's Note: For a recipe tweak, try dipping half of the cranberry biscotti into melted white chocolate or drizzle it on top and let it harden.

    How to Make Cranberry Biscotti

    Steps image collage of making cranberry biscotti dough.

    Step 1: Preheat Oven. Preheat oven to 325°F. Line a large baking sheet with parchment paper (Image 1).

    Step 2: Whisk Ingredients. Whisk the sugar, oil, eggs, orange extract and orange zest together in a large bowl (Image 2).

    Step 3: Add Cranberries and Nuts. Add the cranberries and almonds. Mix with a wooden spoon to combine (Image 3).

    Step 4: Sift Dry Ingredients. In a separate medium bowl, sift together the flour, baking powder, cinnamon and salt (Image 4).

    Steps image collage of forming cranberry biscotti.

    Step 5: Combine. Add the dry ingredients to the wet ingredients and combine well (Image 5).

    Step 6: Divide Dough. On a floured surface, divide the dough in two and shape them into approximately 12" logs. (Image 6). Pro Tip: It helps to use a dough scraper.

    Step 7: Transfer to Baking Sheet. Transfer them to the parchment-lined baking sheet, making sure there is space between the logs (they will expand during baking). Flour your hands and lightly pat them down a bit (Image 7).

    Step 8: Brush With Egg. Brush the logs with the whisked egg (Image 8).

    Steps image collage of baking and serving cranberry biscotti.

    Step 9: Bake. Bake in the preheated oven for about 35 minutes, until golden-brown. Let them cool on the baking sheet for 15 minutes. They should still be warm, but not hot for the next step (Image 9).

    Step 10: Slice. Use a serrated knife to slice the logs crosswise into ½"-¾" thick biscuits (Image 10). Chef's Note: I personally like to slice them ¾" thick.

    Step 11: Return to Oven. Place them back on the baking sheet (cut side up) and into the oven for another 15-20 minutes, until the surface is lightly browned. You may need to use 2 baking sheets to fit them all (Image 11).

    Step 12: Cool and Serve the Cranberry Biscotti. Cool completely on a wire rack. Serve the fresh, cranberry biscotti with a drink that you can dunk them into, like coffee, black tea or even a dessert wine (traditionally Marsala wine or Vin Santo) (Image 12).

    Pro Tip

    If you want a little chewiness, you can bake them for a shorter amount the second time. However, they may not be as dunk-worthy or store as well. It's all down to preference.

    Cranberry biscotti stacked on baking rack.

    Serving Suggestions

    These crispy, crunchy biscuits are meant for dunking!

    • You can serve them with tea, but they also pair well with coffee, cider, hot chocolate, wine (such as my electric skillet mulled wine that is perfect for the holidays) and/or other hot drinks.
    • For something just as festive, try serving cranberry almond biscotti with this cranberry Moscow mule.
    • A less common serving suggestion would be to crumble the cranberry biscotti over a bowl of ice cream.
    • For a restaurant-quality touch for guests, arrange them nicely on the saucer next to the mug of coffee.

    Storage Tips for Cranberry Biscotti

    Cool First: If you're not going to eat your cranberry biscotti right away, don't store them until they've cooled completely. You'll need to wait for the moisture to escape before you can store them safely.

    Otherwise, the moisture could encourage mold and bacteria growth in your biscuits. Generally, biscotti tend to last longer than some cookies and other snacks due to the lack of moisture.

    Room Temperature Storage: Once you've enjoyed your cranberry biscotti, store the leftovers in an airtight bag or container, preferably glass. You can stick them in the pantry, cabinet or a cookie jar on the counter. I personally love how they look in a cookie jar at my kitchen coffee bar.

    Biscotti can last up to a month, but for best results, eat your cranberry almond biscotti within two weeks. After that, the biscuits can turn stale and lose their crunch. Don't store them in the fridge--this can ruin the taste and texture of your biscotti.

    Freezer Storage: Saving your biscotti for a later date? You can place them in an airtight bag or container, then store them in the freezer. They'll last about three months in the freezer.

    Best Way To Thaw Cranberry Biscotti: Make sure you take them out of the container to thaw--otherwise, condensation can result in soggy, unappetizing biscuits. You might also want to heat them up in the oven to help restore their crunchy texture.

    Cranberry biscotti stacked on white background.

    More Holiday Recipes to Consider

    • Fruit salad in dessert glass.
      Christmas Fruit Salad
    • Christmas cookies on serving tray.
      Easy Homemade Christmas Cookies
    • Canadian butter tarts on Christmas themed plate.
      Canadian Butter Tarts
    • Brandy Alexander cocktail in a martini glass with blue stem.
      Brandy Alexander Cocktail

    What's your favorite 🍷 drink to serve with cranberry orange biscotti? If you tried this Cranberry Biscotti Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Cranberry biscotti scattered on baking rack.
    Print Pin
    5 from 3 votes

    Cranberry Biscotti

    Serve your morning coffee or afternoon tea with this fresh, homemade, Italian cranberry biscotti. The hard, crunchy biscuit absorbs the flavor and warmth of the hot beverage. They can also be served with wine, which is traditional.
    Course Breakfast, Dessert, Snack
    Cuisine Italian
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 50 minutes minutes
    Cooling Time 15 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour 20 minutes minutes
    Servings 40 biscuits
    Calories 61kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    • ¾ cup superfine sugar also known as caster sugar
    • ½ cup canola oil or vegetable oil
    • 2 large eggs
    • 1 teaspoon pure orange extract
    • 1 tablespoon orange zest
    • ¾ cup dried cranberries
    • ¾ cup whole almonds
    • 1 ¾ cups AP white flour
    • 2 teaspoons baking powder
    • ½ teaspoon cinnamon
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • 1 egg whisked in a small bowl
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 325°F. Line a large baking sheet with parchment paper.
    • Whisk the sugar, oil, eggs, orange extract and orange zest together in a large bowl. Add the cranberries and almonds. Mix with a wooden spoon to combine.
    • In a separate medium bowl, sift together the flour, baking powder, cinnamon and salt. Add the dry ingredients to the wet ingredients and combine well.
    • On a floured surface, divide the dough in two and shape them into approximately 12" logs. It helps to use a dough scraper.
    • Transfer them to the parchment-lined baking sheet, making sure there is space between the logs (they will expand during baking). Flour your hands and lightly pat them down a bit.
    • Brush the logs with the whisked egg. Bake in the preheated oven for about 35 minutes, until golden-brown. Let them cool on the baking sheet for 15 minutes. They should still be warm, but not hot for the next step.
    • Use a serrated knife to slice the logs crosswise into ½"-¾" thick biscuits (I personally like them to be ¾").
    • Place them back on the baking sheet (cut side up) and into the oven for another 15-20 minutes, until the surface is lightly browned. You may need to use 2 baking sheets to fit them all.
    • Cool completely on a wire rack. Serve the biscotti with a drink that you can dunk them into, like coffee, black tea or even a dessert wine (traditionally Marsala wine or Vin Santo).

    Notes

    • Room temperature storage: Once you've enjoyed your biscotti, store the leftovers in an airtight bag or container, preferably glass. You can stick them in the pantry, cabinet or a cookie jar on the counter. Biscotti can last up to a month, but for best results, eat your cranberry almond biscotti within two weeks. Don't store them until they've cooled completely. You'll need to wait for the moisture to escape before you can store them safely.
    • Don't store them in the fridge-this can ruin the taste and texture of your biscotti.
    • Freezer storage: Saving your biscotti for a later date? You can place them in an airtight bag or container, then store them in the freezer. They'll last about three months in the freezer.
    • To Thaw: Make sure you take them out of the container to thaw-otherwise, condensation can result in soggy, unappetizing biscuits. You might want to heat them up in the oven to help restore their crunchy texture.
    • Baking Tip: If you want a little chewiness, you can bake them for a shorter amount the second time, however they may not be as dunk-worthy or store as well.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 61kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 8mg | Sodium: 27mg | Potassium: 55mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 14IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 21mg | Iron: 1mg

    Kimchi Tofu Stir Fry

    November 22, 2021 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    This kimchi tofu is a delicious stir fry that will leave you satisfied with its abundance of vegetables, protein-packed tofu, and a sweet and salty punch of flavor that Asian dishes tend to have.

    Kimchi tofu stir fry on black dish, fork and knife on the side.

    Vegetables like kimchi, bell peppers, and carrots give a great crunch that complements well with the fried tofu. The simple sauce brings it all together with its sweet and salty flavor. If you like the combination of kimchi and tofu, you might also like this spicy kimchi tofu soup.

    For those that are hesitant about the tofu, here is some information to help you out. Tofu is made of condensed soy milk that is pressed into blocks. It can be soft or firm and it can be cut in different ways for various recipes, including desserts. It benefits from a tofu marinade as it doesn't have much flavor on its own.

    The extra-firm tofu is best for stir fries as it holds up well to heating and stirring and better replicates the texture of meat.

    The process is said to have originated in China over 2000 years ago when fresh soy milk was accidentally mixed with nigari. Nigari is the solution formed after seawater is mostly precipitated and the salt harvested. Basically, precipitated ocean water - salt = nigari. It contains mostly magnesium chloride. It helps tofu solidify, and can also enhance the fermentation of sauerkraut or kimchi.

    Kimchi tofu stir fry on black dish.

    Tofu is popular in vegetarian diets. With its low calories, high protein, vitamins and minerals, tofu makes for a great meat substitute. If following this type of diet, be sure to choose vegetarian broth and kimchi for this recipe, as regular kimchi can contain seafood products such as fish sauce or shrimp paste.

    Kimchi tofu stir fry on black dish with a fork and knife, bowl of scallions and sauce on the side.

    The taste is said to be a subtle nut flavor. It is like pasta in that it has little flavor, but you can add any sauce or seasoning for more flavor. Since this recipe has a soy garlic sauce, the tofu will soak it up like a sponge. For a more crispy tofu, you can press it ahead of time to extract moisture.

    Kimchi tofu stir fry on black dish with a fork.

    If you want to add something special or exciting to your kimchi tofu, nuts and seeds are a great addition for their flavor and crunch. Peanuts are the most popular nut in most Asian dishes, but check for allergies first. If you want a savory but creamy addition, an egg will work well, especially if it's soft-boiled. For side dishes, vegetarian spring rolls will make for a more filling meal.

    Did you enjoy the combination of kimchi and tofu? Let us know in the comments!

    HUNGRY FOR MORE? TRY OUR:

    • Kimchi Grilled Cheese
    • Bok Choy Stir Fry

    📋Recipe

    Kimchi tofu stir fry on black dish.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Kimchi Tofu Stir Fry

    This delicious kimchi tofu stir fry will leave you and your guests satisfied with its abundance of vegetables, protein-packed tofu, and a sweet and salty punch of flavor.
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine Chinese, Korean
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 9 minutes minutes
    Marinating Time 30 minutes minutes
    Total Time 49 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 317kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    For the Tofu

    • 1 pound extra firm tofu drained and cubed
    • 1 tablespoon soy sauce
    • 1 tablespoon sesame oil
    • 2 tablespoons cornstarch

    For the Stir Fry

    • 2 tablespoons canola oil divided
    • 1 red bell pepper sliced
    • 1 green bell pepper sliced
    • 1 cup yellow onion sliced
    • 1 cup carrots sliced thinly
    • 1 cup mushrooms cleaned and sliced
    • 1 cup kimchi
    • 2 tablespoons soy sauce
    • 3 tablespoons brown sugar
    • 1 teaspoon sesame oil
    • ½ cup chicken broth
    • 3 garlic cloves minced
    • 1 tablespoon cornstarch

    Toppings

    • green onions sliced
    • sesame seeds
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    For the Tofu

    • In a medium bowl, toss the tofu with the soy sauce and sesame oil. Marinate for 30 minutes in the fridge.
    • After marinating, remove from the refrigerator and toss with the cornstarch. Reserve.

    For the Stir Fry

    • Heat 1 tablespoon of the canola oil in a large skillet or wok over medium-high heat. Add the tofu and sauté until golden on all sides. This should take about 5 minutes. Remove from skillet and set aside.
    • Heat the remaining 1 tablespoon canola oil in the skillet or wok. Add the peppers, onions, carrots, mushrooms and kimchi. Sauté for 2-3 minutes, until the veggies are tender-crisp.
    • In a small bowl, whisk together the soy sauce, brown sugar, sesame oil, chicken broth, garlic and cornstarch.
    • Pour the sauce over the vegetables, add the tofu back to the wok and continue cooking until the sauce has heated and thickened, about 2 minutes.
    • Serve topped with the green onions and sesame seeds. It can be served over rice or noodles, if desired.

    Notes

    • Cover and store leftovers in the fridge for up to 3 to 5 days.
    • Reheat in the pan or in the microwave.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 317kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 12g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 1g | Sodium: 830mg | Potassium: 598mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 18g | Vitamin A: 6389IU | Vitamin C: 70mg | Calcium: 78mg | Iron: 2mg

    Slow Cooker Mexican Soup

    November 17, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 2 Comments

    This Mexican soup is an easy, tasty and nutritious slow cooker soup inspired by the country's Indigenous-Spanish flavors and ingredients.

    Mexican soup in black bowls with tortilla strips.

    It's full of Mexican flavors and cooked in one dish, much like my spicy burrito casserole, which makes it great for any day of the week.

    This delicious soup can appeal to meat eaters or vegetarians. Simply add some protein along with the other ingredients if you're craving meat or make it vegetarian as is.

    Some more hot and cozy soup recipes you might want to dig into this fall are this easy red lentil soup, a bright mango soup recipe out of India and an oven roasted tomato soup.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Various vegetables like bell peppers, onions, garlic and corn give different textures and complex spicy and sweet flavors. The best part is that you can add any toppings you want to it: sour cream, shredded cheese, corn chips, or cilantro for a fresh component.

    Mexican soup ingredients labeled.
    • tomatoes - Use whatever you have on hand such as Roma, beefsteak etc.
    • tomato passata - Passata is an uncooked tomato purée without seeds or skin because it has been strained. What makes it different from tomato sauce is that tomato sauce is cooked and sometimes other ingredients added: like carrots, onions, herbs and garlic. If you can't find tomato passata, I recommend using tomato sauce for this recipe, as it will be the closest substitute in this case.
    • vegetable broth - This soup is developed to be vegetarian but you can substitute with chicken broth if needed.
    • black beans - Drained and rinsed.
    • canned corn kernels - You can substitute with frozen corn kernels instead of canned as an additional option.
    • Mexican seasoning - Or taco seasoning.
    • sugar - Or agave nectar--optional.
    • optional toppings - Sour cream, Mexican shredded cheese blend, fresh cilantro, avocado, jalapeños, corn chips or tortilla chips etc.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make Mexican Soup

    Here are the steps to making this easy and delicious soup:

    Diced vegetables and tomato passata in slow cooker with wooden spoon.

    Step 1: Add Ingredients to Slow Cooker. Add all of the ingredients (except for the toppings) to the slow cooker.

    Mexican soup in a slow cooker with a lid.

    Step 2: Cover and Cook. Cover and cook for 4 hours on low. Season with salt and pepper, to taste.

    Mexican soup in slow cooker on wooden background.

    Step 3. Ladle. Ladle into bowls.

    Mexican soup in black bowls, cilantro and a tomato on the side.

    Step 4. Serve. Serve the slow cooker Mexican soup with the toppings.

    Joss' Tips

    • Don't overfill: Slow cookers should not be more than ⅔ full. Too much liquid can cause the soup to overflow.
    • Adjust seasoning at the end: Slow cooking can dilute the flavors. Taste and adjust the seasoning of this Mexican soup at the end of the cooking time.
    • Avoid the temptation to lift the lid: Every time you lift the lid, you lose heat and extend the cooking time. If the clear glass lid is steamed up, I just give the slow cooker a gentle shake and as the steam runs down it becomes clear for viewing, at least for a short time.

    Serving Tips

    Tortilla Chips. One of the options for toppings is tortilla chips. You can have them in the soup or enjoy them on the side. They can soak up the broth while you dip them and will hold their shape better than regular bread slices. Similar to crackers, they have an unbeatable crunchy texture.

    Homemade tortilla chip option. Did you know that you can make your own with leftover corn tortillas? Just cut them into small triangles, brush them with olive oil, season them and bake them in a 375°F oven until they are crispy. You can have your own homemade, salty chips to dip into the soup!

    Add rice. If you want a more filling Mexican vegetable soup, I recommend adding cooked rice to the bowl. It is a vegetarian option that will help satisfy your hunger and it pairs well with the other ingredients.

    Add protein. If you would like to add some protein for a heartier Mexican soup option, add 2 to 3 raw chicken breasts to the slow cooker along with the other ingredients. Cook on low for 4 to 6 hours, until the chicken is fully cooked. Remove the chicken to shred it with two forks and return it to the slow cooker. Or, added leftover shredded chicken towards the end of cooking.

    Serve it on the side. If you want to be able to satisfy everyone, you can cook the chicken separately, shred it, and leave it on the side for family or guests to add into their bowls if they wish, along with the other toppings.

    Mexican Soup FAQs

    How long do leftovers last in the fridge?

    This Mexican soup should last up to 3 to 4 days covered in the fridge.

    Can you freeze Mexican soup?

    Yes you can! To freeze, let the soup cool first and store it in labeled, freezer-safe containers for up to 3 months (without the toppings). Thaw in the fridge.

    How do you reheat leftover Mexican soup?

    Reheat in a pot on the stove over medium heat.

    Mexican soup in black bowls with tortilla strips.

    More Slow Cooker Recipes to Try

    • Buffalo chicken dip with green onions in serving dish.
      Easy Slow Cooker Buffalo Chicken Dip
    • Bison chili with toppings in cast iron dish.
      Slow Cooker Bison Chili
    • Cabbage and bacon in bowl.
      Irish Slow Cooker Cabbage & Bacon
    • Red wine cheese dip in mini slow cooker.
      Red Wine & Cheese Dip (for Mini Slow Cooker)

    If you tried this Slow Cooker Mexican Soup Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Mexican soup in black bowls.
    Print Pin
    5 from 3 votes

    Slow Cooker Mexican Soup

    This Mexican soup is an easy, tasty and nutritious slow cooker soup inspired by the country's Indigenous-Spanish flavors and ingredients.
    Course Soup
    Cuisine Mexican
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 4 hours hours
    Total Time 4 hours hours 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 185kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Slow cooker

    Ingredients

    For the Slow Cooker

    • 1 cup red onion diced
    • 1 cup green bell pepper diced
    • 2 cloves garlic minced
    • 1 cup tomatoes diced
    • 2 cups tomato passata or plain tomato sauce
    • 3 cups vegetable broth
    • 1 cup black beans drained and rinsed
    • 1 cup canned corn kernels drained--you can substitute with frozen corn kernels if needed
    • 1 tablespoon Mexican seasoning or taco seasoning
    • 1 tablespoon sugar or agave nectar optional
    • salt and pepper to taste

    Optional Toppings

    • sour cream
    • Mexican cheese blend shredded
    • cilantro chopped
    • 1 avocado diced
    • 1 jalapeño sliced
    • corn chips or tortilla chips
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Add all of the ingredients to the slow cooker.
      Diced vegetables and tomato passata in slow cooker with wooden spoon.
    • Cover and cook for 4 hours on low. Season with salt and pepper, to taste.
      Mexican soup in a slow cooker with a lid.
    • Serve in individual bowls with the toppings.
      Mexican soup in black bowls, cilantro and a tomato on the side.

    Notes

    • Note on nutrition info: Nutrition information does not include the toppings as those are optional.
    • Protein addition: If you would like to add some protein, add 2 to 3 raw chicken breasts to the slow cooker along with the other ingredients. Cook on low for 4 to 6 hours, until the chicken is fully cooked. Remove the chicken to shred it with two forks and return it to the slow cooker.
    • Fridge storage: This soup should last up to 3 to 4 days covered in the fridge.
    • Freezer storage: To freeze, let the soup cool first and store it in labeled, freezer-safe containers for up to 3 months (without the toppings). Thaw in the fridge.
    • Reheating: Reheat in a pot on the stove over medium heat.
    • Don't overfill: Slow cookers should not be more than ⅔ full. Too much liquid can cause the soup to overflow.
    • Avoid the temptation to lift the lid: Every time you lift the lid, you lose heat and extend the cooking time. If the clear glass lid is steamed up, I just give the slow cooker a gentle shake and as the steam runs down it becomes clear for viewing, at least for a short time.
    • Adjust seasoning at the end: Slow cooking can dilute the flavors. Taste and adjust the seasoning at the end of the cooking time.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 185kcal | Carbohydrates: 40g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Sodium: 1589mg | Potassium: 818mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 1805IU | Vitamin C: 51mg | Calcium: 49mg | Iron: 3mg

    Banana Ketchup

    November 15, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 2 Comments

    Swap out your savory tomato ketchup with the sweet flavor of Filipino banana ketchup. The name isn't misleading--this condiment contains bananas along with a mixture of spices similar to what you would find in a bottle of the red stuff. It's easy to make and ready in under 30 minutes.

    Banana ketchup in a small jar and on a small spoon on wooden dish. Thai red chili peppers in a small wooden bowl on the side.

    You can get creative with what you serve it with; mainly savory foods like spaghetti, fries and barbecued foods work. This might sound weird, but my daughter and I love it with Grandma's scrambled eggs.

    I also have these homemade condiment recipes I think you'll like: maple burger sauce, chipotle mayo sauce and homemade mole poblano sauce.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What is Banana Ketchup?

    Banana ketchup is a fruit ketchup made of bananas, vinegar, sugar and spices and is popular in the Philippines.

    Spread, pour and dip it just like tomato ketchup to give your favorite dishes a touch of sweetness and tang. The creamy color adds a unique shade to the presentation, although you can dye it red to resemble the store-bought version.

    The Ingredients

    Banana ketchup ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • canola oil (not pictured) - Just a touch for frying the onions, garlic and chili pepper.
    • sweet onion - You can substitute with yellow onions.
    • chili pepper - I add Thai red chili peppers for a nice kick of heat.
    • bananas - Make sure they are ripe for best flavor and texture of the ketchup.
    • apple cider vinegar - A classic ketchup ingredient for that well-known tang. It also helps to extend the shelf life.
    • brown sugar - To enhance the flavor of the ketchup and cut the acidity.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make it

    Chopped onions, chilies and garlic in a frying pan.

    Step 1: Fry the Vegetables. In a medium frying pan or saucepan over medium heat, heat the canola oil. Add the garlic, onions and chili pepper. Cook until softened, about 5 minutes.

    Sliced bananas in a frying pan with onions.

    Step 2: Add Bananas. Add the bananas, brown sugar, apple cider vinegar and water. Mix to combine.

    Sliced bananas in a frying pan with apple cider vinegar and brown sugar.

    Step 3: Simmer. Heat until the mixture is simmering. Reduce the heat to medium-low and simmer for 10 minutes. Remove from heat and let cool slightly.

    Banana ketchup mixture on a wooden spoon and a blender jar.

    Step 4: Blend. Transfer the mixture to a blender and process until smooth. If you would like a thinner ketchup, add some more water until desired consistency is reached.

    Banana ketchup in a small jar and on a small spoon. Chili peppers, a cinnamon stick and banana pieces on the side.

    Step 5: Season & Serve. Season with a little bit of salt, to taste. Serve!

    Serving Suggestions

    Surprisingly, banana ketchup isn't that different from tomato ketchup in how you would use it. It may sound like a dessert dish but this unique condiment pairs well with salty and savory dishes that balance out the tanginess.

    In fact, you can eat it with burgers (such as grilled bison burgers), French fries, steak, fish, hot dogs, skillet fried chicken and other classic comfort foods.

    Storage Info

    Note that homemade ketchup isn't the same as store-bought ketchup, which you can store in the pantry before you open the container. Always keep the homemade version refrigerated or frozen.

    • Fridge: Once you've made your banana ketchup, store it in the fridge to maintain freshness. You can keep it in the fridge for about 2 to 3 weeks if you store it in an airtight container.
    • Freezer: If you're not going to use it right away, you can stick it in the freezer for up to three months.

    Top Tip

    If you prefer a thinner ketchup, simply add some more water until you reach your desired consistency. It's just as easy to adjust the vinegar and sugar to your own taste!

    You can also experiment with adding some cinnamon and cloves for a warmer flavor.

    Banana Ketchup FAQs

    What are the origins of banana ketchup?

    Maria Orosa, who studied food chemistry, is the creator of Banana ketchup. This sweet condiment has its roots in a tomato shortage/banana abundance in the Philippines. Maria had a strong desire for her nation to use products already available instead of relying heavily on imports such as tomatoes.

    This led to the creation of banana ketchup--one of her many food inventions. In the 1940s, mass-produced banana ketchup entered the market and it became common in Filipino households.

    Why are some banana ketchups red?

    Today, the condiment is often dyed red and served in glass bottles just like tomato ketchup. In fact, if you placed the condiments side-by-side, you might not notice the difference. In this recipe, I chose to skip the food dye but feel free to add some if you wish.

    What does banana ketchup taste like?

    It has the same tang that tomato ketchup does. The main difference in taste is the extra sweetness and distinct flavor from the puréed bananas instead of tomatoes and the slightly spicy addition of chilies.

    Banana ketchup in a small jar and on a small spoon, chili peppers on the side.

    ❤️More International Food Recipes You Will Love

    • Mexican soup in black bowls.
      Slow Cooker Mexican Soup
    • Cabbage rolls stacked on plate.
      How to Make Cabbage Rolls
    • Korean kimchi chicken thighs in bowl with lemon wedges.
      Korean Kimchi Chicken
    • Peanut butter soup in a speckled bowl.
      Peanut Butter Soup

    If you tried this 🍌 Filipino Banana Ketchup Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Banana ketchup in a small jar and on a small spoon.
    Print Pin
    5 from 3 votes

    Banana Ketchup

    Swap out your savory tomato ketchup with the sweet flavor of Filipino banana ketchup. It's easy to make and ready in under 30 minutes.
    Course Condiment
    Cuisine Filipino
    Diet Vegan, Vegetarian
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes minutes
    Total Time 25 minutes minutes
    Servings 20 tablespoons
    Calories 25kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Blender

    Ingredients

    • 1 tablespoon canola oil
    • 2 cloves garlic chopped
    • ½ cup sweet onion chopped--or yellow onion
    • 1 Thai red chili pepper seeded and chopped
    • 2 medium bananas sliced (8.5 oz./240 g)
    • 2 tablespoons brown sugar
    • ¼ cup apple cider vinegar
    • ¾ cup water
    • salt to taste
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • In a medium frying pan or saucepan over medium heat, heat the canola oil. Add the garlic, onions and chili pepper. Cook until softened, about 5 minutes.
      1 tablespoon canola oil, 2 cloves garlic, ½ cup sweet onion, 1 Thai red chili pepper
      Chopped onions, chilies and garlic in a frying pan.
    • Add the bananas, brown sugar, apple cider vinegar and water. Mix to combine.
      2 medium bananas, 2 tablespoons brown sugar, ¼ cup apple cider vinegar, ¾ cup water
      Sliced bananas in a frying pan with apple cider vinegar and brown sugar in a small bowl.
    • Heat until the mixture is simmering. Reduce the heat to medium-low and simmer for 10 minutes. Remove from heat and let cool slightly.
      Sliced bananas in a frying pan with apple cider vinegar and brown sugar.
    • Transfer the mixture to a blender and process until smooth. If you would like a thinner ketchup, add some more water until desired consistency is reached.
      Banana ketchup in a blender, red chilies on the side.
    • Season with a little bit of salt, to taste. Serve!
      Banana ketchup in a small jar, chili peppers and a cinnamon stick on the side.

    Notes

    • This recipe yields approximately 1 ¼ cups ketchup.
    • Make sure they are ripe for best flavor and texture of the ketchup.
    • You can add more vinegar or brown sugar according to your taste. You can also experiment with adding some cinnamon and cloves for a warmer flavor.
    • Refrigerate in an airtight container for up to 3 weeks.
    • You can also freeze it for up to 3 months.
    • In stores today, the condiment is often dyed red and served in glass bottles just like tomato ketchup. In this recipe, I chose to skip the food dye but feel free to add some if you wish.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 25kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 1g | Sodium: 2mg | Potassium: 53mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 9IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 4mg | Iron: 1mg

    Kimchi Quesadillas

    November 10, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    Kimchi quesadillas are a great fusion of Asian and Mexican cuisine with a mix of tangy, umami flavors. The Mexican shredded cheese provides plenty of gooey, creamy texture while the chicken satisfies that savory, meat craving. This delicious 30-minute meal is perfect for busy weeknights or a quick lunch.

    Kimchi quesadillas on dark plate with avocado and diced tomatoes on the side.

    Not so Traditional But Crave-Worthy

    The kimchi gives the whole quesadilla a sour kick; it's kind of like a salsa replacement with Asian flavors for your quesadilla. This is one of the most flavorful quesadillas I've ever had!

    Some of the most common traditional ingredients in quesadillas are cheese, mushrooms, potatoes, chicken, chiles, Mexican herbs and chorizo (one of my personal favorites). Now, we see a whole new world of quesadilla fillings, including this kimchi version.

    If you're loving the kimchi fusion recipes, you should also check out my kimchi eggs, kimchi burritos and kimchi pizza. And if you want to go the extra step, you should also check out how to make kimchi.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Kimchi quesadilla ingredients labeled on terra cotta tile background.
    • white onion - you can substitute with yellow onion if that is what you have on hand
    • kimchi - make sure you drain it well before chopping it up to avoid sogginess
    • leftover cooked chicken - shredded or diced and seasoned (can try this easy slow cooker shredded Mexican chicken)
    • large flour tortillas - about 8"-10" is a great size
    • Mexican blend shredded cheese - you can shred some regular cheddar instead as a substitute
    • cilantro and other toppings - if you don't like cilantro in your recipes simply leave it out

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Recipe Tweaks

    • Beans. If you wish to add more ingredients into your kimchi quesadilla, beans are a popular choice. Black beans are my favorite, but you can also use kidney, pinto, or edamame to match the Asian cuisine.
    • More Flavor. For more flavor, you can toss the cooked chicken in some taco seasoning.
    • More Filling. If you're feeling really hungry and adventurous, cook some rice (brown or white) and add it into your quesadilla. It matches with both the Asian and Mexican cuisine, it is easy to mix in, and will soak up the flavors.

    How to Make Kimchi Quesadillas

    Kimchi chicken filling for quesadillas in pan.

    Step 1. Sauté the veggies. Sauté the onion over medium heat until soft, about 5 minutes. Add the kimchi and cooked chicken and cook for 3 more minutes. Reserve.

    Kimchi quesadilla cooking in pan.

    Step 2. Cook the kimchi quesadillas. Over medium-low, place one tortilla in the pan and spread half of the fillings on top. Place another tortilla on top and cook for 3-4 minutes on each side, until the cheese is fully melted and tortillas are golden-brown.

    Pan-fried kimchi quesadilla sliced on cutting board.

    Step 3. Repeat, cool and slice. Carefully remove from the pan to a cutting board. Repeat with the remaining tortillas and filling. Cool for 2 minutes and then slice each quesadilla into 4 or 8 wedges.

    Kimchi quesadillas on dark plate with avocado and diced tomatoes on the side.

    Step 4. Serve. Garnish the kimchi quesadillas with fresh cilantro and serve immediately with the chopped avocado, tomatoes and/or other desired toppings.

    Condiment Options

    • sour cream tastes amazing on kimchi quesadillas and kimchi omelettes
    • easy tomatillo hot sauce
    • pico de gallo
    • guacamole (check out my tutorial for how to make guacamole)
    • dip into white cheddar nacho cheese sauce for an extra cheesy quesadilla
    • chipotle mayo sauce if you like it extra spicy

    Joss' Tip

    If your tortillas are not exactly the same size (this is pretty common), start with the larger one on the bottom of the pan. I find it easier to flip!

    Kimchi Quesadillas FAQs

    Where did kimchi quesadillas come from?

    Kimchi quesadillas are a fusion dish from the countries of Mexico and North Korea. Quesadilla, meaning "little cheesy thing", originated from central and northern parts of Mexico and spread from there.

    How long do leftovers last in the fridge?

    To store, cool the quesadillas first, and then place in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 days.

    Can you freeze the leftovers?

    These quesadillas can also be frozen (without the fresh toppings) for up to 3 months in a freezer bag.

    How do you reheat the leftovers?

    Reheat in the pan over medium heat or in the oven at 350°F. If they were frozen you can reheat them in the oven from frozen.

    Kimchi quesadillas sliced on black serving tray with a lime wedge.

    More Kimchi Recipe Creations to Try

    • Kimchi tofu stir fry on black dish.
      Kimchi Tofu Stir Fry
    • Kimchi hot dogs with small bowls of toppings on serving tray.
      Kimchi Hot Dogs
    • Kimchi in a bowl.
      28 of Our Best Kimchi Recipes
    • Kimchi pancakes stacked on top of each other.
      Kimchi Pancakes

    If you tried this Fusion Kimchi Quesadillas Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Kimchi quesadillas on serving tray.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Kimchi Quesadillas

    These kimchi quesadillas are a great fusion of Asian and Mexican cuisine with a mix of tangy, umami flavors. The Mexican shredded cheese provides plenty of gooey, creamy texture while the chicken satisfies that savory, meat craving.
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine Korean, Mexican
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 20 minutes minutes
    Total Time 30 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 wedges
    Calories 224kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Large frying pan
    • Large spatula

    Ingredients

    For the Quesadillas

    • 1 tablespoon canola oil
    • ½ cup white onion chopped
    • 2 cups kimchi drained and chopped
    • 2 cups cooked chicken breast shredded or diced
    • 4 large flour tortillas about 8"-10"
    • 2 cups Mexican blend shredded cheese

    Fresh Toppings (Optional)

    • 1 avocado chopped
    • 2 tomatoes chopped
    • fresh cilantro to garnish
    • sour cream
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Heat a large non-stick frying pan to medium heat. Add the canola oil and sauté the onion until soft, about 5 minutes.
      1 tablespoon canola oil, ½ cup white onion
    • Add the kimchi and cooked chicken and cook for 3 more minutes, stirring frequently. Remove from the pan and reserve.
      2 cups kimchi, 2 cups cooked chicken breast
    • Turn the heat down to medium-low. Place one tortilla in the pan and spread half of the cheese and kimchi/chicken mixture on top.
    • Place another tortilla on top. Press it down gently with a small lid or spatula and cook for 3-4 minutes on each side, until the cheese is fully melted and tortillas are golden-brown.
    • Carefully remove from the pan to a cutting board with a large spatula. Repeat with the remaining tortillas and filling.
    • Cool for 2 minutes and then slice each quesadilla into 4 or 8 wedges.
    • Garnish with fresh cilantro and serve immediately with the chopped avocado, tomatoes and/or other desired toppings.

    Notes

    • Fridge Storage: To store, cool the quesadillas first, and then place in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 days.
    • Freezer Storage: They can also be frozen for up to 3 months in a freezer bag.
    • Reheating Instructions: Reheat in the pan over medium heat or in the oven at 350°F. If they were frozen, you can reheat them in the oven from frozen. Make sure they are heated all of the way through.
    • Tip: If your tortillas are not exactly the same size (this is pretty common), start with the larger one on the bottom of the pan. I find it easier to flip.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 224kcal | Carbohydrates: 9g | Protein: 17g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 53mg | Sodium: 324mg | Potassium: 142mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 199IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 207mg | Iron: 1mg

    How to Rim a Glass with Sugar

    November 8, 2021 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    Learn how to rim a glass with sugar, and start planning a home bar for friends and family members. It's a fun and useful skill for parties and holiday gatherings that can be used on any glass you can think of.

    3 glasses with sugar rims.

    You won't find a classic margarita without a salt or sugar rim. The sugar rim gives the drink a cool, sparkling appearance, adds to the visuals of the drink and enhances the flavor. It can balance out the flavors of a drink, especially in cocktails that have tart or sour elements (like a margarita or lemon drop).

    However, sugar rims don't just accompany margaritas--they're also great for sweet or bitter cocktails, fruity drinks, smoothies and even coffee and hot chocolate. You can try out your new skills on this fog cutter tiki drink, fresh homemade lemonade or hibiscus tea cocktail.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients and Tools

    Ingredients and tools for glass rim on black background.
    • Small flat plates - To spread the sugar and syrup onto.
    • Cocktail glass of choice - Or even a glass coffee mug.
    • sugar rim of your choice - Or plain white or brown sugar. I have 3 flavors of homemade sugar rim for you to try! You can also use candy sprinkles if desired, depending on the occasion.
    • Something to wet the rim - Such as lime or lemon wedges/juice, maple syrup, simple syrup etc.

    How to Rim a Coffee Mug

    Adding a sugar rim to a coffee mug might sound unconventional, but it adds a lot of flavor and charm to your holiday drinks. A touch of maple syrup and sugar--especially flavored sugar--adds extra flavor to your coffee and hot chocolate.

    Cinnamon sugar rim on a small glass plate.

    Step 1: Add Sugar to Plate. Add a good amount of sugar rim or plain sugar to a small plate evenly (I use a cinnamon-sugar rim because it goes well with coffee).

    Prepped ingredients and tools for sugar rimming on black background.

    Step 2: Add Syrup to Separate Plate. Pour about 2 tablespoons of maple syrup into a separate plate, or enough to coat the plate evenly (you could also use a flavored simple syrup or other types of syrups).

    A clear glass coffee mug dipped into a plate of maple syrup.

    Step 3: Dip Mug into Syrup. Dip the mug into the syrup and release.

    A clear glass coffee mug dipped into a plate of cinnamon sugar.

    Step 4: Press Mug into Sugar. Press the mug into the sugar mix to coat the rim.

    Cinnamon sugar rim on a coffee mug.

    Step 5: Set the Sugar. Let sit for a few minutes to harden before filling the glass.

    How to Sugar Rim a Margarita Glass

    While a margarita typically calls for a salt rim, it's perfectly okay to use a sweet rim instead and some people prefer this. When you're finished the rim, you can check out my tutorial for how to make a strawberry margarita and fill the glass with cold, strawberry deliciousness.

    Lemon sugar rim on a plate.

    Step 1: Add Sugar to Plate. Add a good amount of sugar rim to a small plate evenly, making sure the plate is wider than the margarita glass (you can use plain white sugar or get fancy with a zesty sugar rim).

    Lemon wedge on a margarita glass.

    Step 2: Wet the Glass Rim. Cut a slit into the middle of a lime or lemon wedge (not too deep). Slide it onto the margarita glass and run it all around the edge to make it wet.

    Chef's Note: Alternatively, you could add some lime or lemon juice to a separate plate and dip the glass in it.

    Margarita glass dipping into sugar rim.

    Step 3: Press Glass into Sugar. Press the margarita glass into the sugar mix to coat the rim (or you can hold the glass at an angle and roll it in the sugar instead).

    Margarita glass dipped into sugar rim.

    Step 4: Let the Sugar Set. Let sit a few minutes to set before filling the glass.

    How to Rim Other Cocktail Glasses

    This method can apply to any cocktail glass you plan on using. Just remember to make sure the plate of sugar is wider than the diameter of the glass.

    Blender with pink sugar.

    Step 1: Add Sugar Rim to Plate. Add a good amount of sugar rim to a small plate evenly.

    Cocktail glass dipped in simple syrup.

    Step 2: Wet the Rim. Pour some simple syrup into a separate small, shallow dish (I used lemon-flavored simple syrup). Dip the glass into the syrup.

    Alternatively: you could cut a slit into the middle of a lemon or lime wedge and rub it around the rim of the glass.

    Chef's Note: I used pink lemonade sugar rim but you can use any choice of sugar. For example, if you're making a black fog Guinness cocktail, you could use black candy sprinkles, a darker sugar rim or keep it simple with white sugar. Try to match the rim to the drink.

    Cocktail glass dipping into pink sugar.

    Step 3: Press Cocktail Glass into Sugar. Press a cocktail glass into the sugar mix to coat the rim completely (or you can hold the glass at an angle and roll it in the sugar instead).

    Cocktail glass dipped in pink sugar.

    Step 4: Let Sit. Let the cocktail glass sit a few minutes to harden before filling the glass.

    Ready to Serve

    Sugar rim flavors in 3 jars with rimmed glasses in the background.

    Proceed to filling the glass with your desired beverage and serve! And now you know how to rim a glass with sugar, adding an aesthetic touch to your bartender skills.

    Pro Tips

    Glass rimming might be easy enough, but you'll need to know a few techniques to preserve the flavor and aesthetic of the drink.

    • When you wet the rim with a syrup or citrus juice on a plate, dip the glass into the syrup evenly and release.
    • If using a lime or lemon wedge to wet the rim, do not cut too deeply into the middle of the slice or the sugar will stick too far down the glass. If you do, the sugar can come in direct content with the drink, potentially ruining the flavor. Remember that there's a difference between having sugar on the side and actively mixing it into the drink.
    • Some bartenders recommend twisting the glass in the sugar, but some don't. Try both ways and see what works for you. Personally, I like to dip and release.
    • Be generous with the sugar on the plate to get enough coverage.
    • The diameter of the sugar on the plate should be wider than the glass.
    • You can use anything from fine sugar to coarse sugar, brown or white, or even candy sprinkles or crushed strawberry candy, depending on the look/taste you are going for.
    • To wet the rim, you can use citrus juice, citrus wedges, syrups, melted chocolate or even a liqueur that matches the drink.
    • You can buy tools to help you rim the glass, such as a 3 tier glass rimmer.
    • Not sure if your guests will like it? You can rim one side of the mug and leave the other side blank so your guests can choose whether they want the extra flavor or not.
    • While the sugar rim isn't the main event of your drink, your guests should be able to consume the rim without being overwhelmed with sugar. Don't assume that more sugar is always better. Instead, use a light touch to sweeten the rim without encrusting it in hard sugar flakes. This is especially important if you use an ingredient like cinnamon that has a little kick.

    FAQs for How to Rim a Glass With Sugar

    How do you get sugar to stick to glass rims?

    You simply need something wet like citrus juice or simple syrup to wet the rim with before dipping into the sugar. Once you let the sugar sit on the rim for a few minutes it should harden onto the glass.

    Can you put sugar on the rim of a margarita?

    Sure you can! The salt is used to balance the sweetness of the drink but if you like the extra sweetness from a sugar rim, you can use that too.

    Can you use lemon juice to rim a glass?

    Yes, you can use any citrus juice to rim a glass. You can either squeeze the lemon juice onto a flat plate and dip the glass into it or cut a slit into a lemon wedge and run it along the rim.

    Can you use regular sugar for a sugar rim?

    Yes, you can use regular white or brown sugar instead of flavored.

    Assortment of glasses that have been rimmed with sugar.

    Related Drinks to Consider

    • Cinnamon orange glögg in wine glass.
      Swedish Glögg
    • Irish coffee in coffee mug with 4 leaf clover, whipped cream and chocolate curls.
      Irish Coffee Cocktail
    • Brandy Alexander cocktail in a martini glass with blue stem.
      Brandy Alexander Cocktail
    • Pomegranate mojito mocktails.
      Pomegranate Mojito Mocktail

    If you tried this 📋 recipe tutorial for How to Rim a Glass with Sugar or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Cocktail glasses with sugar rim.
    Print Pin
    5 from 3 votes

    How to Rim a Glass with Sugar

    Learn how to rim a glass with sugar, and start planning a home bar for friends and family members. The sugar rim gives the drink a cool, sparkling appearance, adds to the visuals of the drink and enhances the flavor.
    Course Drinks
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegan, Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Total Time 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 1
    Calories 46kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Small plates
    • Cocktail glass or glass coffee mug

    Ingredients

    • ½ cup sugar rim of your choice or plain white or brown sugar
    • 1 something to wet the rim lime or lemon wedges/juice, maple syrup, simple syrup etc.
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    For a Coffee Mug

    • Add a good amount of sugar rim or plain sugar to a small plate evenly (I use a cinnamon-sugar rim because it goes well with coffee).
      Cinnamon sugar rim on a small glass plate.
    • Pour about 2 tablespoons of maple syrup into a separate plate, or enough to coat the plate evenly (you could also use a flavored simple syrup or other types of syrups).
      Prepped ingredients and tools for sugar rimming on black background.
    • Dip the mug into the syrup.
      A clear glass coffee mug dipped into a plate of maple syrup.
    • Press the mug into the sugar mix to coat the rim. Let sit for a few minutes to harden before filling the glass.
      A clear glass coffee mug dipped into a plate of cinnamon sugar.

    For a Margarita Glass

    • Add a good amount of sugar rim to a small plate evenly, making sure the plate is wider than the margarita glass (you can use plain white sugar or get fancy with a lime zest sugar rim).
      Lemon sugar rim on a plate.
    • Cut a slit into the middle of a lime or lemon wedge (not through the peel and not too deep). Slide it onto the margarita glass and run it all around the edge to make it wet. Alternatively: you could add some lime or lemon juice to a plate and dip the glass in it.
      Lemon wedge on a martini glass.
    • Press the margarita glass into the sugar mix to coat the rim (or you can hold the glass at an angle and roll it in the sugar instead). Let sit a few minutes to harden before filling the glass.
      Martini glass dipped into sugar rim.

    For Other Cocktail Glasses

    • Add a good amount of sugar rim to a small plate evenly.
      Cocktail glass dipped in simple syrup.
    • Pour some simple syrup into a separate small, shallow dish. Dip a cocktail glass into the syrup. (Alternatively, you could cut a slit into the middle of a lemon or lime wedge and rub it around the rim of the glass.)
    • Press the glass into the sugar mix to coat the rim completely (or you can hold the glass at an angle and roll it in the sugar instead). Let sit a few minutes to harden before filling the glass.
      Cocktail glass dipped in pink sugar.

    Notes

    • Nutrition information is for 1 tablespoon of the sugar.
    • Some bartenders recommend twisting the glass in the sugar, but some don't. Try both ways and see what works for you. Personally, I like to dip and release.
    • Be generous with the sugar on the plate to get enough coverage.
    • The diameter of the sugar on the plate should be wider than the glass.
    • You can use anything from fine sugar to coarse sugar, brown or white, or even candy sprinkles, depending on the look/taste you are going for.
    • To wet the rim, you can use citrus juice, citrus wedges, syrups, melted chocolate or even a liqueur that matches the drink.
    • Not sure if your guests will like it? You can rim one side of the mug and leave the other side blank so your guests can choose whether they want the extra flavor or not.
    • Don't assume that more sugar is always better. Instead, use a light touch to sweeten the rim without encrusting it in hard sugar flakes. This is especially important if you use an ingredient like cinnamon that has a little kick.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 46kcal | Carbohydrates: 12g | Fat: 0.04g | Sodium: 0.1mg | Potassium: 0.2mg | Sugar: 12g | Calcium: 0.1mg | Iron: 0.01mg

    Sugar Rim (3 Flavors)

    November 3, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    Add texture and flavor to your drinks with a sweet sugar rim. You traditionally see them with margaritas and other cocktails, but you can serve them with virtually any drink--coffee, hot chocolate, lemonade or even regular fruit juice.

    Sugar rims in 3 small jars, a lime wedge, lemon wedge and cinnamon stick on the side.

    The sugar adds an extra kick of sweetness, plus some zest or spice if you mix it with other ingredients.

    Here are some fun and fancy, flavored sugars you can make easily at home including: cinnamon, lime and pink lemonade. Try experimenting with different colors and flavors to match your favorite drinks.

    Once you're finished, you can check out how to rim a glass with sugar using one of these flavorful, homemade rims.

    Try your favorite flavor with a gingerbread coffee, fog cutter drink or watermelon basil cocktail, to name a few.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    🧉 Cinnamon Sugar Rim

    Ingredients

    Cinnamon sugar rim ingredients.
    • white sugar - You can also use brown sugar if you prefer.
    • cinnamon powder - This adds warm flavor perfect for fall and winter.

    *Check ingredient amounts in recipe card.

    How to Make a Cinnamon Sugar Rim

    Cinnamon and sugar in a small glass bowl with a spoon on black background.
    1. Mix the sugar with the cinnamon.
    2. Store in an airtight container in a pantry or cupboard.

    Drink Pairing

    Sugar rim on a coffee mug on marble background.
    • This flavor goes well with coffee using a glass mug, or for creamy cocktails such as this Brandy Alexander retro cocktail.
    • Cinnamon sugar tastes great with hot drinks, especially during the autumn months. Try it with this London Fog tea.
    • Start serving homemade coffee, hot chocolate or pumpkin beer with a spicy cinnamon rim.
    • This rim also pairs well with other cocktails that have a lot of milk or cream. The creaminess offsets the kick of the cinnamon, creating a delicious drink that pairs well with holiday dinners.

    🍋‍🟩 Lime Zest Rim

    Ingredients

    Lime zest sugar rim ingredients.
    • white sugar - Regular white granulated sugar.
    • lime zest - Freshly grated using a small hole grater or rasp.

    Instructions

    Lime sugar rim spread out on pan.

    Step 1. Mix the sugar with the lime zest. Spread it out onto a wax paper lined baking sheet and let dry for about 1 hour.

    Lime sugar rim in blender.

    Step 2. You can break up any clumps by hand or by giving it a quick pulse in the blender.

    Chef's Note: You can fold the wax paper up to quickly and easily transfer the sugar to the blender.

    Lime zest sugar rim in a small jar with a lime wedge on the side.

    Step 3. It's ready to use. Store in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 months.

    Drink Pairing

    Lime sugar rim on margarita glass on marble background.
    • Lime zest flavor is perfect for numerous cocktails, limeade and especially margaritas. Try it with a frozen strawberry margarita, one of my favorites for summer!
    • This easy peach Bellini could also benefit from a lime flavored rim.
    • Rim the glass with fruity sugar, then pour your favorite cold drink and enjoy margaritas on the beach.

    Pro Tip #1

    If lime zest doesn't pair well with the cocktail, try another citrus fruit like orange, lemon or even grapefruit. Lime sugar is also perfect for non-alcoholic drinks like fruit juice, flavored water or non-alcoholic Moscow mules.

    🍋 Pink Lemonade Glass Rim

    Ingredients

    Pink lemonade sugar rim ingredients.
    • white sugar - You can use regular white granulated sugar. Super fine sugar will give you more even coverage.
    • lemon zest - Freshly grated.
    • red food coloring - Or pink if you have. I like to use a touch of gel food coloring but you can also use liquid. You will get a bolder color with gel.

    Instructions

    Blender with pink sugar.

    Step 1. Add the sugar and food coloring to a blender jar. Pulse until the color is blended well. You can add more drops to reach desired color. Mix the lemon zest into the colored sugar.

    Chef's Note: Alternatively, you can hand-mix the sugar with the color in a bowl.

    Pink sugar rim spread out on wax paper.

    Step 2. Spread the colored sugar out onto a wax paper lined baking sheet and let dry for about 1 hour. After it dries, you can break up the clumps by giving it a quick pulse in the blender again. It's ready to use!

    Drink Pairing

    Pink sugar rim on a cocktail glass on marble background.
    • Pink lemonade flavor brings out the sweetness in your favorite fruity drinks.
    • This rim flavor goes well with hard (alcoholic) or regular (non-alcoholic) lemonades (such as pink lemonade). You can serve it with any type of homemade lemonade recipe.
    • Try it with my strawberry-flavored virgin daiquiri or other cocktails that need a kick of citrus.

    Pro Tip #2

    To complete the flavor profile, you could add a 🍋 lemon wedge that your guests can squirt directly into the cocktail.

    ❓ Recipe FAQs

    What is a sugar rim?

    It's simply a decorative (and tasty) ring of sugar applied to the rim of a glass. It's most popular for cocktails to add flavor and presentation to the drink.

    How long do they last?

    Store in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 months.

    Can you freeze them?

    Yes! The citrus sugar rims can also be frozen for up to 3 to 6 months for best quality. It's not necessary for the cinnamon rim.

    Sugar rims in 3 small jars, a lime wedge, lemon wedge and cinnamon stick on the side.

    🍹 Related Cocktail Recipes

    • Hibiscus cosmo in martini glass with cherry.
      Hibiscus Tea Cosmo
    • Spring white wine sangria in wine glass.
      Spring White Wine Sangria
    • Irish coffee in coffee mug with 4 leaf clover, whipped cream and chocolate curls.
      Irish Coffee Cocktail
    • Fall pumpkin party punch in a glass with orange slice garnish.
      Fall Pumpkin Party Punch

    If you tried this Sugar Rim Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Three sugar rims in small glass jars on marble background.
    Print Pin
    5 from 4 votes

    Sugar Rim (3 Flavors)

    Add texture and flavor to your drinks with these 3 flavors of sweet sugar rim: cinnamon sugar, lime zest and pink lemonade.
    Course Drinks, Flavoring
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Total Time 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 tablespoons
    Calories 48kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    Cinnamon-Sugar Rim

    • ½ cup sugar
    • 1 teaspoon cinnamon

    Lime Zest Sugar Rim

    • ½ cup sugar
    • 1 tablespoon lime zest

    Pink Lemonade Sugar Rim

    • ½ cup sugar
    • 1 tablespoon lemon zest
    • 5 drops red food coloring or pink if you have
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    Cinnamon-Sugar Rim

    • Mix the sugar with the cinnamon.
      ½ cup sugar, 1 teaspoon cinnamon
    • Store in an airtight container in a pantry or cupboard. This sugar rim flavor goes well with coffee, hot chocolate or other hot drinks using a glass mug. It's also perfect for creamy cocktails.

    Lime Zest Sugar Rim

    • Mix the sugar with the lime zest. Spread it out onto a wax paper lined baking sheet and let dry for about 1 hour.
      ½ cup sugar, 1 tablespoon lime zest
    • You can break up any clumps by hand or by giving it a quick pulse in the blender.
    • Store in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 months. This sugar rim flavor goes well with margaritas, limeade or other cocktails.

    Pink Lemonade Sugar Rim

    • Add the sugar and food coloring to a blender jar. Pulse until the color is blended well. You can add more drops to reach desired color. (Alternatively you can hand-mix the sugar with the color in a bowl.)
      ½ cup sugar, 5 drops red food coloring
    • Mix the lemon zest into the colored sugar.
      1 tablespoon lemon zest
    • Spread the colored sugar out onto a wax paper lined baking sheet and let dry for about 1 hour.
    • After it dries, you can break up the clumps by giving it a quick pulse in the blender again.
    • Store in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 months. This sugar rim goes well with hard or regular lemonades (like pink lemonade) or other cocktails.

    Notes

    • Lime swap: The lime zest sugar rim recipe would also work with grapefruit, orange or lemon zest.
    • Nutrition info: The nutrition information is only for the sugar, per tablespoon.
    • Food coloring type: I like to use a touch of gel food coloring but you can also use liquid. You will get a bolder color with gel.
    • Freezer storage: The citrus sugar rims can also be frozen for up to 3 to 6 months for best quality.
    • Tip: When you're breaking up the clumps, you can fold the wax paper up to quickly and easily transfer the sugar to the blender.
    • How to use sugar rims: Once you're finished, you can check out how to rim a glass with sugar using one of these flavorful, homemade sugar rims.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 48kcal | Carbohydrates: 12g | Sodium: 1mg | Potassium: 1mg | Sugar: 12g | Calcium: 1mg | Iron: 1mg

    Kimchi Pancakes

    November 1, 2021 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    Enjoy the taste and texture of Korean kimchi in this simple recipe for savory kimchi pancakes. Perfect for a family or anyone looking to add a more unique dish to their kitchen repertoire. You can make them in less than 30 minutes and enjoy this cultural dish from your own home.

    Kimchi pancakes on plate with sweet and sour sauce and sesame seeds.

    Instead of a sweet pancake recipe, like my pancake bread, this version of pancakes is savory and not limited to breakfast. While there are a number of fusion kimchi recipes out there, such as my kimchi ramen and kimchi quesadillas, this recipe tends to be more on the traditional side.

    Referred to as "kimchijeon" in Korean, these kimchi pancakes are typically eaten as a side dish, snack or appetizer.

    They could even be served as a savory breakfast option alongside a fried egg and this electric skillet sausage.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Kimchi pancake ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • eggs - I use large eggs for the batter.
    • kimchi - Can be purchased in grocery stores, Asian specialty stores, online, farmers' markets or homemade. You may need to experiment with different kimchi brands to find your favorite or learn how to make kimchi to use in these kimchi pancakes.
    • kimchi brine - This is just the seasoned liquid in the jar of kimchi.
    • canola oil (not pictured) - For frying.
    • soy sauce - Regular soy sauce.
    • flour - Use all purpose flour.
    • green onions - Also known as scallions.
    • sesame seeds - Can use white, black or both.
    • cilantro - Optional garnish.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Chef's Note: Kimchi pancakes consist of a basic batter that isn't sweetened, but instead seasoned with soy sauce and then packed with kimchi, sesame seeds and other veg. It's one of my favorite fermented and nutritious dishes when I'm not feeling like something sweet.

    How to Make Kimchi Pancakes

    Liquid kimchi batter ingredients in a glass bowl.

    Step 1: Whisk. In a medium bowl, whisk together the egg, kimchi brine, soy sauce and water.

    Kimchi pancake batter in a bowl with a spatula.

    Step 2: Add Flour. Add the flour and mix with a wooden spoon or spatula until combined.

    Kimchi pancake ingredients in a glass bowl and sesame seeds on a small plate.

    Step 3: Add Kimchi. Add kimchi, green onions, garlic and sesame seeds. Stir to combine.

    Kimchi pancake batter in a frying pan.

    Step 4: Add Batter to Skillet. Heat a large non-stick skillet over medium heat with a tablespoon of canola oil. Drop ¼ cup of the batter into the skillet for each pancake and shape into a disc.

    Chef's Note: Cooking no more than two at a time will ensure there is room in the pan for flipping.

    Kimchi pancakes in a frying pan with a flipper.

    Step 5: Cook the Pancakes. Cook pancakes until golden brown on both sides, about 2-3 minutes per side. Repeat for all of the pancakes.

    Kimchi pancakes stacked with sweet and sour sauce drizzling over them.

    Step 6: Serve. Serve immediately with sweet and sour sauce and fresh cilantro, if desired.

    Joss' Tips

    • One of the most important steps to keep in mind is to give your oiled cooking pan sufficient time to preheat before adding the pancake batter. This crucial preparation will ensure that you are actually frying the pancakes, leading to the sought-after crispy outer texture, rather than just heating them and letting them absorb the oil.
    • Cast iron skillets are excellent for retaining heat, even after adding your mix, and are nice and sturdy. A non-stick pan will also work great.
    • The sweet and sour sauce perfectly complements these tangy pancakes, so make sure you have some available on the side! Think of the sauce as the savory version of syrup for pancakes. It's just not the same without it.

    Storage

    • Refrigerate: This recipe is best eaten immediately, although leftovers can be stored in the fridge for up to 2 to 3 days.
    • Freeze: You can also freeze them for up to 3 months in a freezer bag--just freeze them individually first on a pan and then pop them in a bag and back into the freezer.

    Recipe FAQs

    What is kimchi pancake made of?

    It consists of a batter made with flour, egg, Korean kimchi, water and other seasonings.

    What do you eat kimchi pancake with?

    They are usually served with an Asian sauce for dipping. They can be paired with other native dishes such as pickled radish, kimchi vegetable stir fries, warm pumpkin porridge (also known as hobakjuk) or soybean sprouts.

    Why is my kimchi pancake not crispy?

    Make sure you added and heated up the oil in the pan prior to adding the batter. It will crisp the pancakes up nicely.

    Can you reheat kimchi pancake?

    Yes! When reheating, skip the microwave to avoid a soggy pancake and use your stovetop or oven to maintain the crispiness of the pancakes.

    Kimchi pancakes stacked on a plate.

    More Delicious Kimchi Recipes to Try

    • Sliced kimchi pizza on round serving board.
      Kimchi Pizza
    • Kimchi burger with creamy kimchi sauce.
      Korean Kimchi Burgers
    • Kimchi in a bowl.
      28 of Our Best Kimchi Recipes
    • Kimchi cream cheese spread in a small black bowl, surrounded by tortilla chips.
      Kimchi Cream Cheese Spread

    If you tried this Kimchi Pancakes Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Kimchi pancakes stacked on top of each other.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Kimchi Pancakes Recipe

    Enjoy the taste and texture of Korean kimchi in this simple recipe for savory kimchi pancakes. Perfect for a family or anyone looking to add a more unique dish to their kitchen repertoire.
    Course Appetizer, Breakfast, Side Dish, Snack
    Cuisine Korean
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 16 minutes minutes
    Total Time 26 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 small pancakes
    Calories 92kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Large frying pan

    Ingredients

    • 1 large egg
    • 2 tablespoons kimchi brine
    • 2 tablespoons soy sauce
    • ¼ cup water
    • ¾ cup AP Flour
    • 1 cup Korean kimchi diced (without the brine)
    • 2 green onions chopped (about ⅓ cup)
    • 1 teaspoon garlic minced
    • 2 tablespoons sesame seeds
    • 1 tablespoon canola oil
    • sweet and sour sauce to serve
    • fresh cilantro optional garnish
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • In a medium bowl, whisk together the egg, kimchi brine, soy sauce and water.
      1 large egg, 2 tablespoons kimchi brine, 2 tablespoons soy sauce, ¼ cup water
      Liquid kimchi batter ingredients in a glass bowl.
    • Add the flour and mix with a wooden spoon or spatula until combined.
      ¾ cup AP Flour
      Kimchi batter ingredients in a glass bowl with a whisk.
    • Add kimchi, green onions, garlic and sesame seeds. Stir to combine.
      1 cup Korean kimchi, 2 green onions, 1 teaspoon garlic, 2 tablespoons sesame seeds
      Kimchi pancake ingredients in a glass bowl and green onions in a small bowl.
    • Heat a large non-stick skillet over medium heat. Add the canola oil and swirl it around to coat the bottom.
      1 tablespoon canola oil
      Kimchi pancake batter on a spoon.
    • Drop ¼ cup of the batter into the skillet for each pancake and shape into a disc. Cooking no more than two at a time will ensure there is room in the pan for flipping.
      Kimchi pancake batter in a frying pan.
    • Cook pancakes until golden brown on both sides, about 2-3 minutes per side. Repeat for all of the pancakes.
      Kimchi pancakes in a frying pan with a flipper.
    • Serve immediately with sweet and sour sauce and fresh cilantro, if desired.
      Kimchi pancakes stacked with sweet and sour sauce and sesame seeds.

    Notes

    • This recipe is best eaten immediately, although leftovers can be stored in the fridge for up to 2 to 3 days.
    • You can also freeze them for up to 3 months in a freezer bag--just freeze them individually first on a pan and then pop them in a bag and back into the freezer.
    • One of the most important steps to keep in mind is to give your oiled cooking pan sufficient time to preheat before adding the pancake batter. This crucial preparation will ensure that you are actually frying the pancakes, leading to the sought-after crispy outer texture, rather than just heating them and letting them absorb the oil.
    • Cast iron skillets are excellent for retaining heat, even after adding your mix, and are nice and sturdy. A non-stick pan will also work great.
    • When reheating, skip the microwave and use your stovetop or oven to maintain the crispiness of the pancakes.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 92kcal | Carbohydrates: 10g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 20mg | Sodium: 216mg | Potassium: 56mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 60IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 45mg | Iron: 1mg

    Electric Skillet Sausage

    October 27, 2021 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    Electric skillet sausage is the epitome of a classic and simple meal. Sausages pair perfectly with a multitude of condiments and side dishes, such as this kimchi potato salad, and can be ready in as little as 15 minutes!

    Electric skillet sausage on a cast iron dish with sauerkraut and mustard on the side.

    While the image of perfectly seared bratwurst sausage links might entice you to get outside and grill the bratwurst, you will be thrilled to learn that this tantalizing meal can be achieved indoors, in any weather condition, 365 days a year.

    This recipe outlines the best way to cook any sausage variety in your electric frying pan, including correct temperatures.

    Plus, if you have leftovers, you can make this hot and spicy pickled sausage.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    • sausages - The first step is to select your sausage of choice. The recipe calls for bratwurst specifically, but any variety of sausage will work. Keep in mind that pork sausage such as bratwurst or andouille with often be juicier and more flavorful than other varieties (which is why they tend to be used for sausage rolls). If you are looking for a lighter alternative, chicken and turkey sausage links are available in most grocery stores and specialty butcher shops.
    • condiments - Sauerkraut and hot mustard are typical but feel free to experiment. I know my kids love the classic ketchup.

    *Check recipe card for full ingredients/amounts.

    How to Make Electric Skillet Sausage

    A cast iron pan filled with sliced sausages on a grey dish towel, sauerkraut and mustard in the background.
    1. Heat the electric skillet to 325°F. Grease with the cooking oil.
    2. Add the sausages and cook until browned on all sides and cooked through to an internal temperature of 160°F, about 12-15 minutes total.
    3. Serve the sausage with mustard and sauerkraut on the side, if desired.

    Chef's Note: The best temperature to cook sausage in an electric skillet is between 300°F and 350°F (on the higher end if they're pre-cooked), so feel free to adjust the dial accordingly. See more about electric skillet temperature for sausages here.

    Recipe FAQs

    How long do leftovers last in the fridge?

    Leftover links can be refrigerated for a few days, and repurposed for other meals, such as being incorporated into spaghetti sauce, a homemade electric skillet pizza, or a hearty breakfast scramble.

    Can you freeze the leftover cooked sausages?

    Yes! You can freeze cooked sausage for up to 2 to 3 months in an airtight container. You may even choose to freeze sliced links for future use and serve them as an appetizer at your next dinner party.

    Didn't find the answer you're looking for?

    Ask AI to answer based on this specific recipe:

    ChatGPT
    Google AI

    ⭐ Be sure to also check out my Best Electric Skillet Reviews.

    Electric skillet sausage on a cast iron dish.

    More Delicious Skillet Recipes

    • Electric skillet breakfast sausage and egg hash on plate.
      Electric Skillet Breakfast Hash
    • Piece of lasagna on a plate.
      Electric Skillet Lasagna
    • Kimchi pancakes stacked on top of each other.
      Kimchi Pancakes
    • Mac and Cheese in white ramekin.
      Electric Skillet Mac and Cheese

    What is your favorite variety of sausage to cook with? If you tried this Electric Skillet Sausage Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Sausage sliced on a small cast iron tray.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Electric Skillet Sausage

    Sausage links are the epitome of a classic and simple meal and can be ready in as little as 15 minutes in the electric skillet.
    Course Appetizer, Breakfast, Main Course
    Cuisine American, German
    Prep Time 1 minute minute
    Cook Time 15 minutes minutes
    Total Time 16 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 252kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Electric Skillet
    • Thermometer

    Ingredients

    • 1 tablespoon cooking oil such as canola, peanut, grapeseed, avocado, etc.
    • 4 Bratwurst sausages or your favorite sausage
    • condiments mustard, sauerkraut, etc.
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Heat the electric skillet to 325°F. Grease with the cooking oil.
      1 tablespoon cooking oil
    • Add the sausages and cook until browned on all sides and cooked through to an internal temperature of 160°F, about 12-15 minutes total.
      4 Bratwurst sausages
    • Serve with mustard and sauerkraut on the side, if desired.

    Notes

    • Sausage varieties: The recipe calls for bratwurst specifically, but any variety of sausage will work. Keep in mind that pork sausage such as bratwurst or andouille with often be juicier and more flavorful than other varieties. If you are looking for a lighter alternative, chicken and turkey sausage links are available in most grocery stores and specialty butcher shops.
    • Fridge storage: Leftover links can be refrigerated for up to 3 to 4 days, and repurposed for other meals, such as being incorporated into spaghetti sauce, a homemade pizza, or a hearty breakfast scramble.
    • Freezer storage: You can also freeze cooked sausage for up to 2 to 3 months in an airtight container.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 252kcal | Carbohydrates: 2g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 12g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 49mg | Sodium: 558mg | Potassium: 230mg | Vitamin A: 4IU | Calcium: 18mg | Iron: 1mg

    Pumpkin Seed Milk

    October 20, 2021 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    Pumpkin seed milk is an easy, nutritious, dairy-free and vegan, milk recipe. The agave nectar gives the milk its sweetness, and the pumpkin seeds add a subtly nutty and creamy taste.

    Pumpkin seed milk in a small jar on white background with pumpkin seeds in the background.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Sip on Something New This Fall

    The process of milking the seeds will challenge your upper body strength (especially if you are using a nut milk bag), but the added time and effort is worth it for homemade seed milk!

    Pumpkin seeds normally come in a shell, but in this recipe you will be using raw, shelled seeds; this will save time in preparation. You can also make pumpkin seed butter with them.

    You can drink it on its own or elevate it by using it in this recipe for fresh strawberry milk instead of cow's milk.

    For more pumpkin-flavored recipes, try out this pumpkin and goat cheese galette, savory creamy pumpkin soup or one of my fall morning favorites: pumpkin spice coffee creamer.

    Pumpkin Seed Milk Ingredients

    Pumpkin seed milk ingredients.
    • pumpkin seeds - they need to be raw and shelled
    • filtered water - for quality purposes
    • salt - a touch of sea salt or pink Himalayan salt as a flavor enhancer and natural preservative
    • vanilla extract - to add flavor
    • agave nectar - or honey

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make Pumpkin Seed Milk

    Pumpkin seeds and water in a bowl.

    Step 1: Soak the Pumpkin Seeds. In a bowl, soak the pumpkin seeds in 2 cups filtered water for 4 hours or overnight.

    Pumpkin seeds and filtered water in a blender jar.

    Step 2: Drain & Process the Seeds. Drain and rinse the pumpkin seeds with cool water. Process the drained pumpkin seeds with 3 cups filtered water and salt in a large blender, until mostly smooth and creamy.

    Chef's Note: It will have a very slight, green hue.

    Plant-based milk dripping through a nut milk bag.

    Step 3: Strain the Milk. Strain the liquid through a nut milk bag or cheesecloth to make it smooth.

    Agave nectar pouring into a measuring glass filled with pumpkin seed milk.

    Step 4: Add Sweetener & Vanilla. Add the vanilla and agave nectar. Mix well.

    A jar of milk on light background, pumpkin seeds scattered around it.

    Step 5: Serve! Serve in glasses or chill first.

    Tips On Straining the Seed Milk

    In the recipe, it calls for either a cheesecloth or a nut milk bag. I prefer to use a nut milk bag. For those who do not know, a nut milk bag is a bag used to extract the liquid from the nuts or seeds.

    Its fabric is strong, easy to clean and has finer woven filters, making creamier, smoother milk. They are washable and reusable, which is a bonus.

    Cheesecloth has its advantages, different sizes being one of them, but tends to be less strong and it may not strain the milk as smoothly. Nut milk bags contain the liquid easier and sometimes have drawstrings at the top.

    Check out the above video to see exactly how to use a nut milk bag.

    Recipe FAQs

    How long does homemade pumpkin seed milk last?

    Store any remaining milk in a glass jar in the fridge. You can chill your fresh pumpkin milk in the fridge for up to 4-5 days. Give it a shake before serving. If it smells sour, it's gone bad.

    Can you freeze it?

    If you are not going to use the milk in the next few days, you can attempt to freeze it, but I don't really recommend it. Although the nutritional value is not lost, freezing will cause separation in an unpleasant way.

    If you must, thaw it in the fridge and then try blending it before consumption. If you do decide to freeze it, leave some extra space in the container because milk expands when it freezes.

    What kind of container works best for storing the milk?

    When storing your milk, it is recommended to store them in glass jars because they are airtight and keep milk cold longer.

    What are some benefits of pumpkin milk?

    The shelled seeds contain fiber, antioxidants, potassium, magnesium, vitamin B2, polyunsaturated fatty acids (the good fat), as well as many more vitamins and minerals.

    Consuming pumpkin seeds has also been associated with a lower risk of certain cancers such as breast, prostate and colon.

    The seeds are a natural source of the amino acid tryptophan, which can help promote sleep.

    What to Do With Leftover Pumpkin Seed Pulp

    Pumpkin seed powder in a glass bowl.

    I cringe at the thought of throwing good pulp away when there are so many ways to use it up! Check out a few of the ways below:

    • Dry it at a low temperature in the oven, cool and process it to make a pumpkin powder for smoothies, baking, salads, cereal, yogurt, soups, etc.
    • Form it into a crust for desserts, pizzas, etc.
    • Make crackers.
    • Make energy bites.
    • Make a spread.
    Pumpkin seed milk in a small jar on white background and pumpkin seeds in the background.

    ❤️More Pumpkin Recipes You Will Love

    • Fall pumpkin party punch in a glass with orange slice garnish.
      Fall Pumpkin Party Punch
    • Toasted marshmallow pumpkin spice latte in coffee mug.
      Toasted Marshmallow Pumpkin Latte
    • Oven baked pumpkin spice oatmeal in baking dish.
      Pumpkin Pie Spice Baked Oatmeal
    • Pumpkin fluff dip in a bowl with crushed Biscoff cookies.
      Pumpkin Fluff Dip Dessert

    If you tried this Pumpkin Seed Milk Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Pumpkin seed milk in glass with pumpkin seeds on the side.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Pumpkin Seed Milk

    Pumpkin seed milk is an easy, nutritious, dairy-free and vegan milk recipe. The agave nectar gives the milk its sweetness, and the pumpkin seeds add a subtly nutty and creamy taste.
    Course Drinks
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegan, Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Soak Time 4 hours hours
    Total Time 4 hours hours 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 125kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Nut milk bag
    • Blender

    Ingredients

    • 1 cup raw pumpkin seeds shelled
    • 5 cups filtered water divided
    • ¼ teaspoon salt sea salt or Himalayan
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • 2-3 tablespoons agave nectar or to taste
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • In a bowl, soak the pumpkin seeds in 2 cups filtered water for 4 hours or overnight.
      1 cup raw pumpkin seeds
      Pumpkin seeds and water in a bowl.
    • Drain and rinse the pumpkin seeds with cool water. Process the drained pumpkin seeds with 3 cups filtered water and ¼ teaspoon salt in a large blender, until mostly smooth and creamy. It will have a very slight, green hue.
      Pumpkin seeds and filtered water in a blender jar.
    • Strain the liquid through a nut milk bag or cheesecloth to make it smooth.
      Nut milk squeezing through a nut milk bag.
    • Add the vanilla and agave nectar. Mix well. Serve!
      1 teaspoon vanilla extract, 2-3 tablespoons agave nectar
      Agave nectar pouring into a measuring glass filled with pumpkin seed milk.

    Notes

    • If you're doubling the recipe, make sure to adjust the filtered water amounts.
    • Store any remaining milk in a glass jar in the fridge.
    • Keeps up to 4-5 days in the fridge.
    • Give it a shake before serving. If it smells sour, it's gone bad.
    • If you are not going to use the milk in the next few days, you can attempt to freeze it, but I don't really recommend it. Although the nutritional value is not lost, freezing will cause separation in an unpleasant way.
    • When storing your milk, it is recommended to store them in glass jars because they are airtight and keep milk cold longer.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 125kcal | Carbohydrates: 10g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Sodium: 156mg | Potassium: 131mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 3IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 13mg | Iron: 1mg

    Kimchi Udon Stir Fry

    October 18, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    This 16-minute kimchi udon stir fry has the right amount of spice and complex textures to curb your craving for good Asian food. The udon noodles' chewiness balances the crunchiness of the bell peppers and kimchi. The sauce adds a salty and sour, savory flavor to the noodle dish.

    Kimchi udon noodle stir fry in a black bowl with chop sticks.

    Kimchi tastes amazing in a stir fry! Because udon noodles are mild and chewy, they absorb the sauce and soak up all of that spicy flavor from the kimchi very well.

    I also have a kimchi stir fry with shrimp and kimchi tofu stir fry that you might like.

    This is a simple dish that I love to serve on its own or with other delicious kimchi recipes. To cool things down after your spicy noodle feast, learn how to make mochi ice cream here. It's the perfect, sweet refreshing finish.

    SUMMARIZE & SAVE THIS CONTENT ON

    ChatGPT
    Google AI
    Perplexity
    Grok
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    ❤️ A 16-Minute Fusion Favorite

    While my kimchi pancakes are more traditional, this kimchi recipe is a fusion of Japanese and Korean cooking.

    • It's a quick dinner perfect for busy weeknights. You can enjoy it in less than 20 minutes.
    • It's simple but flavorful with few ingredients.
    • Depending on the kimchi brand, this dish can be an excellent vegetarian option.
    • Even my kids love it.

    🥘 Ingredients

    • udon noodles - I use dry udon noodles. If you dislike udon, you can also use chow mein like I do in this bok choy noodle stir fry.
    • kimchi brine - The liquid from the jar of kimchi.
    • sriracha sauce - This is optional--only if you can handle the heat. If you like it more spicy, add some sliced chili peppers to the wok along with the other vegetables. Or, add some more sriracha.
    • sesame oil - Make sure it is toasted sesame oil.
    • garlic - minced (check out how to mince garlic here)
    • kimchi - If you're interested in making your kimchi from scratch for this recipe, check out my post on how to make kimchi.
    • fresh cilantro - The dish is finished off with cilantro but you can use scallions if desired.

    *Check recipe card for full ingredients/amounts.

    🍜 Udon VS. Soba Noodles

    Flour type. What makes kimchi udon noodles unique from other noodles like soba? By appearance, soba is brown because of its buckwheat flour, while udon uses wheat flour, which makes their noodles white.

    Digestion. While soba noodles are on the healthier side, its buckwheat flour makes it harder to digest for certain people with dietary problems. It can also cause allergic reactions. Udon, on the other hand, is considered the better choice because it is easier on the stomach.

    Shape and texture. Soba noodles are shaped like flat spaghetti while udon noodles are thicker and chewier than soba noodles. Udon noodles are usually eaten in cold tsuyu or soup, but adding them to a stir fry will provide a pleasant texture contrast between the chewy noodles and the crunchy vegetables.

    Kimchi udon noodle stir fry in a black bowl with chop sticks.

    🔪 How to Make Kimchi Udon Stir Fry

    1. Cook the udon. Cook the udon noodles according to package instructions. Drain and reserve in a bowl of cool water.
    2. Make the sauce. In a small bowl, mix the soy sauce, kimchi brine and sriracha sauce together. Set aside.
    3. Sauté. Heat a wok or large frying pan to medium heat and add the oil. Add the garlic, ginger and red peppers. Sauté for 2 minutes, until peppers are tender-crisp.
    4. Drain noodles. Drain the udon noodles and add them to the pan. Add the kimchi and soy sauce mixture. Toss well and heat through.
    5. Serve. Serve immediately, topped with fresh cilantro.

    🥗 Serving Suggestions

    It is recommended to balance the udon noodles out with vegetables, hence the bell peppers and kimchi.

    If you wish to add more vegetables and/or different colors to your kimchi udon, I recommend snap peas (sugar snap peas); they are crunchy and add a subtle, sweet flavor--plus some green color.

    I suggest tipping and stringing the snap peas first because they can be more difficult to eat otherwise.

    If you are looking for a vegetable that will absorb the stir fry sauce and keep their crunch, broccoli will be a good choice.

    As for drinks, this virgin Moscow mule's hint of spice makes it pair perfectly with this light Asian noodle dish. For dessert, try this strawberry mochi recipe.

    ❓Kimchi Udon Stir Fry FAQs

    How do you store the leftovers?

    Store leftovers in a covered container in the fridge for up to 5 days.

    How do you reheat it?

    You can reheat the noodle stir fry in a frying pan over medium heat or microwave. If it seems dry, you can add a splash of kimchi brine to get it saucy again.

    Kimchi udon noodle stir fry in a black bowl with chop sticks and dry udon on the side.

    🥢More Kimchi Recipes You Will Love

    • Kimchi ramen noodle soup in bowl with wooden chopsticks.
      Delicious Kimchi Ramen
    • Kimchi fries with cheese in baking dish.
      Kimchi Fries
    • Kimchi carbonara in a bowl.
      Kimchi Carbonara
    • Kimchi burger with creamy kimchi sauce.
      Korean Kimchi Burgers

    If you tried this Kimchi Udon Stir Fry Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Kimchi udon in a bowl with chop sticks.
    Print Pin
    5 from 3 votes

    Kimchi Udon Stir Fry

    This 16-minute kimchi udon stir fry has the right amount of spice and complex textures to curb your craving for good Asian food. The udon noodles' chewiness balances the crunchiness of the bell peppers and kimchi. The sauce adds a salty and sour, savory flavor to the noodle dish.
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine Japanese, Korean
    Prep Time 8 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 8 minutes minutes
    Total Time 16 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 296kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Wok

    Ingredients

    • 8 ounces dry udon noodles
    • 2 tablespoons soy sauce
    • ¼ cup kimchi brine from the jar
    • 1 tablespoon sriracha sauce optional
    • 2 tablespoons sesame oil
    • 1 tablespoon garlic minced
    • 2 tablespoons ginger grated
    • 2 red bell peppers sliced
    • 1 cup kimchi chopped
    • fresh cilantro to garnish (optional)
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Cook the udon noodles according to package instructions. Drain and reserve in a bowl of cool water.
      8 ounces dry udon noodles
    • In a small bowl, mix the soy sauce, kimchi brine and sriracha sauce together. Set aside.
      2 tablespoons soy sauce, ¼ cup kimchi brine, 1 tablespoon sriracha sauce
    • Heat a wok or large frying pan to medium heat and add the oil. Add the garlic, ginger and red peppers. Sauté for 2 minutes, until peppers are tender-crisp.
      2 tablespoons sesame oil, 1 tablespoon garlic, 2 tablespoons ginger, 2 red bell peppers
    • Drain the udon noodles and add them to the pan. Add the kimchi and soy sauce mixture. Toss well and heat through.
      1 cup kimchi
    • Serve immediately, topped with fresh cilantro.

    Notes

    • Spiciness: If you like it more spicy, add some sliced chili peppers to the wok along with the other vegetables. Or, add some more sriracha.
    • Storage: Store leftovers in a covered container in the fridge for up to 5 days. You can reheat them in the pan or microwave.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 296kcal | Carbohydrates: 45g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 1195mg | Potassium: 192mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 1869IU | Vitamin C: 80mg | Calcium: 14mg | Iron: 1mg

    Dill Pickle Cream Cheese

    October 13, 2021 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    Liven up the cream cheese in your fridge with the tanginess of dill pickles in this homemade dill pickle cream cheese bagel spread recipe. The light, silky cream cheese spreads perfectly across your bagels or toast in the morning, while the sharp dill pickle flavor adds a delicious, salty and sour kick.

    Dill pickle cream cheese spread in a small glass dish with a butter knife, a bagel with spread beside it on cutting board.

    Like compound butter, you can mix cream cheese with a variety of herbs, spices and other flavors. I've always had my breakfast bagels with cream cheese and pickles so naturally I combined those flavors to create this bagel spread; it adds a nice, salty crunch. But I also have a kimchi cream cheese spread you might like.

    The nice thing about this recipe is you can mix it early and store it in the fridge, then break out your favorite spread when it's breakfast time!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    🥒 Dill Pickle Cream Cheese Ingredients

    Dill pickle cream cheese spread ingredients.
    • cream cheese - The brick kind--I use Philadelphia. Make sure you soften the cream cheese before you begin by leaving it at room temperature for 30 minutes to 1 hour, microwave it for 15 to 30 seconds or placing the unopened package in warm water for about 20 minutes.
    • pickle juice - The brine from the pickle jar.
    • pickles - Go for high-quality crunchy pickles.
    • sweet green pickle relish - The relish really elevates the flavor of the spread with a bit of sweet tang.
    • freshly chopped dill - For a pro technique: check out my tutorial for how to chop dill.
    • mustard - I use classic American mustard but if you wanted to try a different mustard like Dijon or spicy brown mustard, let me know how it turned out.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    🔪How to Make it

    Cream cheese and pickle juice in bowl with electric mixer.

    Step 1. Combine. In a medium bowl, combine the softened cream cheese, pickle juice, relish and mustard with an electric mixer.

    Dill pickle cream cheese spread ingredients in bowl with spatula.

    Step 2. Fold. Fold in the diced pickles and dill with a spatula. Season with salt (if needed), to taste.

    Chef's Note: An electric mixer works best to combine the cream cheese mixture until nicely whipped, but you can also use a fork or wooden spoon.

    Dill pickle cream cheese spread on a bagel on wooden cutting board, a mug of tea on the side and fresh dill.

    Step 3. Serve. Serve on bagels, toast or crackers or serve it as a dip for tortilla chips.

    Pro Tip: If you would like it to be a thinner consistency to use it as a dill dip, simply mix in more of the brine or a bit of milk. This recipe doesn't use sour cream but that is another addition that would make it more dippable.

    🍽Serving Suggestions

    • Once you've prepared your spread, you can schmear it on bagels, toast, buttered toast points, crackers, etc.
    • Serve it as an appetizer dip with breadsticks, chips or crackers.
    • Slather it on burgers and sandwiches for added flavor.
    • You could even experiment with dinner entrées that need a creamy spread.
    • If you're looking for a healthier snack, serve your cream cheese with raw vegetables like carrots, celery, cherry tomatoes--or even pickles if you can't get enough.
    • For extra protein, slice up some of these easy pickled eggs or add crispy bacon and layer them onto the bagel with the spread.

    🌡️Storage

    Fridge: Once you've mixed the spread, store it in the fridge as soon as possible. Most store brands come with preservatives that slow the growth of bacteria. However, since we've added fresh ingredients, your cream cheese will be best if you eat it within one to two weeks. Place it in a sealed container so that it maintains its soft, creamy texture.

    Freezer: You can also freeze your cream cheese spread for up to 2 months, but note that the freezing process will change the texture. The cheese might be grainy and crumbly when thawed from the freezer, so I do not recommend it. At that point you would only want to use it for baking, casseroles or in anything that will hide the texture.

    ❓Recipe FAQs

    What cheese goes best with dill pickles?

    Pickles go with a variety of cheeses including brie, feta, havarti and cheddar, but my favorite is cream cheese.

    Can I use dried dill instead of fresh dill?

    You can, but I would start with a small amount if using dried and add more to taste.

    Dill pickle cream cheese spread on a bagel with a butter knife on wooden cutting board.

    ❤️More Dill Recipes You Will Love

    • Red lentil and dill soup in bowl.
      Easy Red Lentil Soup
    • Honey dill sauce in small jar with mini serving spoon.
      Simple Honey Dill Sauce
    • Mediterranea meatballs with fresh dill pesto on plate.
      Cake Pop Maker Mediterranean Meatballs
    • Salmon and dill mousse with caviar in white dish.
      Salmon Mousse

    If you tried this 🥒 Dill Pickle Cream Cheese Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Dill pickle cream cheese bagel spread on bagel and in small glass dish on cutting board.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Dill Pickle Cream Cheese

    Liven up the cream cheese in your fridge with the tanginess of dill pickles in this homemade, dill pickle cream cheese spread recipe. The light, silky cream cheese spreads perfectly across your bagels or toast in the morning.
    Course Condiment
    Cuisine American, Canadian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Total Time 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 16 tablespoons
    Calories 52kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    • 8 ounces cream cheese 1 brick--softened
    • 1 tablespoon pickle juice from the pickle jar
    • 3 tablespoons pickles diced
    • 2 tablespoons sweet green relish
    • 1 tablespoon fresh dill finely chopped
    • 2 teaspoons mustard
    • salt to taste
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • In a medium bowl, combine the softened cream cheese, pickle juice, relish and mustard with an electric mixer.
    • Fold in the diced pickles and dill with a spatula. Season with salt (if needed), to taste.
    • Serve on bagels, toast or crackers or serve it as a dip for tortilla chips.

    Notes

    • For mixing: An electric mixer works best but you can also use a fork or wooden spoon to combine the cream cheese mixture.
    • Consistency: If you would like it to be a thinner consistency to use it as a dip, simply mix in more of the brine or a bit of milk.
    • Pro tips for chopping dill: You can check out my tutorial for how to chop dill here to see the proper technique.
    • Fridge storage: Store in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 2 weeks.
    • Freezer storage: You can also freeze your cream cheese spread for up to 2 months, but note that the freezing process will change the texture. The cheese might be grainy and crumbly when thawed from the freezer, so we do not recommend it.
    • Dried dill substitute: You can use dried dill, but I would start with a small amount and add more to taste.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 52kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 16mg | Sodium: 106mg | Potassium: 30mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 290IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 17mg | Iron: 1mg

    Clear Pumpkin Pie

    October 8, 2021 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    Add an unexpected spin to a holiday classic with this recipe for crystal clear pumpkin pie! This transparent pie is just as simple to prepare as a traditional pumpkin pie, but it will add an element of surprise and wonder to your dish.

    Clear pumpkin pie with dehydrated orange slices.

    Pumpkin pie is one of the most popular pies to serve, especially around Thanksgiving, but sometimes you just want to spice things up a little. That's where this recipe comes in.

    Any level of home cook can make this pie because I provide you with two options for making it (one that's easy and one that's easier): the first method I developed is quicker and results in a crispier pie crust, the second one a softer crust but easier prep and a little more hands-off.

    The majority of your time will be spent simply waiting for the pie to set in the refrigerator! Serve this delicious pie after a Thanksgiving meal of herb roasted chicken, old fashioned bread stuffing, pumpkin galette and sautéed mushrooms.

    Its modern and unusual presentation makes it suitable for a variety of events, no longer confined to the fall and winter seasons. You can find more of my great Thanksgiving recipes here.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What is Transparent Pie?

    Just as it sounds, this pie is clear enough to see through it. The secret ingredient to this concoction is gelatin powder, which gives it that gel-like consistency, like in Jell-O. It allows you to take a clear liquid, in this case flavored water, and turn it into a jiggly, gelatin dessert.

    Chefs at a Chicago restaurant called Alinea are the creators of the clear pumpkin pie, however their version is made translucent by distilling the filling.

    Clear Pumpkin Pie Ingredients

    Clear pumpkin pie ingredients labeled.
    • deep dish raw pie shell - You should be able to find a pre-made deep dish frozen pie shell in the frozen section of the grocery store.
    • gelatin powder - To set the pie filling.
    • pumpkin pie flavored syrup - You can easily make your own or purchase a bottle of pumpkin spice syrup online or at the grocery store.
    • ice cubes - The ice cubes are for the quick-set method.
    • To serve - Pumpkin pie spice, dehydrated orange slices (optional) and whipped cream topping.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Tweaks

    • Add more or less of the syrup to fine-tune it to your taste.
    • Serve it in mini tart shells as opposed to a whole pie.
    • You could also give a graham cracker crust a try instead of your traditional pie crust.

    How to Make Clear Pumpkin Pie

    This particular pie is not distilled, but is gelled and spiced to taste like real pumpkin pie without the usual texture and appearance. This is achieved with the help of a pumpkin spice syrup that adds that signature fall flavor and hue.

    I decided to use the quick-set method in this recipe by adding ice to quickly cool the filling down, which will help to ensure a crispy pie crust instead of a soggy one. It also cuts down on the time it takes to sink your teeth into this tasty dessert! However, I also explain an alternative method at the end of the recipe.

    Raw pie shell with a fork.

    Step 1. Preheat the oven to 375°F. Remove pie dough from the freezer and let stand at room temperature for 15 minutes to thaw. Prick the sides and bottom of the crust with a fork.

    Baked pie shell.

    Step 2. Bake the crust in the preheated oven for 10-12 minutes, or until golden and fully baked. Let the crust cool completely (this will help you avoid a soggy crust).

    Gelatin powder pouring into a saucepan.

    Step 3. Pour 2 cups of water into a large saucepan. Sprinkle the gelatin powder over top and let it sit for 5 minutes.

    Gelatin water mixture in a large saucepan with a blue spatula.

    Step 4. Heat over medium heat. Add the sugar and mix gently until completely dissolved.

    Large saucepan with gelatin mixture and a small bottle of pumpkin pie syrup.

    Step 5. Remove from heat and mix in the pumpkin pie syrup.

    Clear pumpkin pie filling in pie crust.

    Step 6. Add 4 cups of ice cubes to the saucepan. Stir just until the liquid is slightly thickened, about 1 ½ minutes. Remove any leftover ice that didn't melt. Pour the gelatin mixture into the pie crust immediately.

    Clear pumpkin pie with dehydrated orange slices, forks and glass plates stacked on the side.

    Step 7. Chill in the fridge for at least 30 minutes or until fully set.

    Clear pumpkin pie slice on a clear glass plate with dehydrated orange slices and whipped cream.

    Step 8. Sprinkle some pumpkin pie spice on top. You can also garnish with dehydrated orange slices and whipped cream, if desired. Serve the clear pumpkin pie!

    Joss' Tips

    • The most important tip is to pay close attention when cooling the gelatin mixture with the ice. It will thicken quickly and you want it to be pourable and level once it's in the crust.
    • The versatility of this crystal clear pie is endless: you can spice it up with fun toppings such as the dehydrated orange slices, edible flowers or various fall-themed toppings.

    Alternative Method

    For an easier method for this transparent pumpkin pie, you can skip the ice step and simply add 2 more cups of water to the gelatin mixture. You can then pour the mixture straight into the baked/cooled pie crust and let it set in the fridge for about 4 hours or until jiggly.

    This will result in a softer crust but it's an easier way to prepare this recipe for beginners and the filling is sure to be nice and level.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can you make clear pumpkin pie ahead of time?

    You can easily prepare this tasty Thanksgiving dessert a day ahead of time and store in the fridge until you are ready to serve. Just note that the pie crust will be the most crispy on the day of preparation. Beyond that, it starts to soften the longer the filling sits on it.

    How long can you store the leftovers?

    Keep the pie refrigerated. For best results, it should be eaten within 1 to 2 days, but it can be stored for up to 1 week.

    A slice of clear pumpkin pie on a clear glass plate with dehydrated orange slices and whipped cream.

    More Delicious Pumpkin Food and Drink

    • Frosted pumpkin cream cheese bread sliced open.
      Frosted Pumpkin Cream Cheese Bread
    • Pumpkin fluff dip in a bowl with crushed Biscoff cookies.
      Pumpkin Fluff Dip Dessert
    • Pumpkin martinis.
      Pumpkin Pie Spice Martini
    • Creamy pumpkin soup in soup bowls.
      Savory Creamy Pumpkin Soup

    If you tried this Clear Pumpkin Pie Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe! Happy pumpkin season!

    📋Recipe

    Clear pumpkin pie with dehydrated orange slices.
    Print Pin
    5 from 5 votes

    Clear Pumpkin Pie

    Add an unexpected spin to a holiday classic with this recipe for crystal clear pumpkin pie! This transparent pie is just as simple to prepare as a traditional pumpkin pie, but it will add an element of surprise and wonder to your dish.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Diet Low Salt
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes minutes
    Chill Time 30 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour
    Servings 8
    Calories 209kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    For the Pie

    • 1 pre-made deep dish frozen pie shell
    • 2 cups water
    • 3 tablespoons gelatin powder 3 pouches
    • ½ cup white sugar
    • 2 tablespoons pumpkin pie syrup
    • 4 cups ice cubes

    Toppings

    • pumpkin pie spice
    • dehydrated orange slices optional
    • whipped cream topping
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 375°F. Remove pie dough from the freezer and let stand at room temperature for 15 minutes to thaw. Prick the sides and bottom of the crust with a fork.
      Clear pumpkin pie ingredients on concrete style background.
    • Bake in the preheated oven for 10-12 minutes, or until golden and fully baked. Let the crust cool completely (this will help you avoid a soggy crust).
      Baked pie shell.
    • Pour 2 cups of water into a large saucepan. Sprinkle the gelatin powder over top and let it sit for 5 minutes.
      3 tablespoons gelatin powder
      Gelatin powder pouring into a saucepan.
    • Heat over medium heat. Add the sugar and mix gently until completely dissolved. Remove from heat and mix in the pumpkin pie syrup.
      ½ cup white sugar
      Gelatin water mixture in a large saucepan with a blue spatula.
    • Add 4 cups of ice cubes to the saucepan. Stir just until the liquid is slightly thickened, about 1 ½ minutes. (It will thicken quickly and you want it to be pourable, so pay close attention.) Remove any leftover ice that didn't melt. Pour the gelatin mixture into the pie crust immediately.
      Clear pumpkin pie.
    • Chill in the fridge for at least 30 minutes or until fully set.
      Clear pumpkin pie with dehydrated orange slices, forks and glass plates stacked on the side.
    • Sprinkle some pumpkin pie spice on top. You can also garnish with dehydrated orange slices and whipped cream, if desired. Serve!
      Clear pumpkin pie on a clear glass plate with dehydrated orange slices and whipped cream.

    Notes

    • Storage: Keep refrigerated. For best results, eat within 1 to 2 days but it can be stored for up to 1 week.
    • Tip: The most important tip is to pay close attention when cooling the gelatin mixture with the ice. It will thicken quickly and you want it to be pourable and level once it's in the crust.
    • Alternative Method: For an easier method, you can skip the ice step and simply add 2 more cups of water to the gelatin mixture. You can then pour the mixture straight into the baked/cooled pie crust and let it set in the fridge for about 4 hours or until jiggly. This will result in a softer crust but it's an easier way to prepare this recipe for beginners and the filling is sure to be nice and level.
    • Toppings: The versatility of this crystal clear pie is endless: you can spice it up with fun toppings such as edible flowers or more fall-themed toppings.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 209kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Sodium: 121mg | Potassium: 28mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 14g | Calcium: 14mg | Iron: 1mg

    Homemade Pumpkin Spice Coffee Syrup

    October 6, 2021 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    Sweeten your drinks and treats with this homemade pumpkin spice coffee syrup. While Starbucks has their famous pumpkin spice latte that we all know and love, sometimes it's a joy to be able to make your own pumpkin spice coffee at home with this easy syrup recipe.

    Pumpkin spice syrup in a small decorative jar, a spoon of pumpkin pie spice and a glass of pumpkin spice latte on the side.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    🧡 A Fall-Favorite Syrup DIY Style

    The actual craze for pumpkin-spiced drinks and food is said to have started with Starbucks with their limited time latte in 2003. This drink is featured every fall season (technically beginning the end of summer), along with a range of other drinks and snacks with the same flavor.

    By making this recipe at home, you can enjoy pumpkin-spiced flavors all year long if you really want to.

    The best part is, this DIY pumpkin spice simple syrup can be used in other treats to give everything a fall theme and warm, spiced flavor (including pancakes and ice cream). I use it in this clear pumpkin pie recipe. Here are some tips and info on how to make and enjoy it in under 20 minutes.

    ☕ Homemade Pumpkin Spice Syrup Ingredients

    You only need 3 ingredients plus water to make this tasty syrup:

    Pumpkin pie spice coffee syrup ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • brown sugar - Classic pumpkin pie sweetener.
    • pumpkin purée - Unlike the coffee chain, this cozy hot beverage contains real pumpkin. You can use canned or fresh.
    • pumpkin pie spice - The spice can be easily found in various grocery stores. If you do not have the time to shop for them, you can diy your own by mixing the spices together.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Chef's Note: You will also need cheesecloth or a nut milk bag (my preference) to strain the syrup. It will have a more desirable texture, taste and color and last longer with this step.

    🥣 How to Make Pumpkin Spice Syrup

    This recipe yields about 2 cups syrup.

    Pumpkin spice syrup ingredients in saucepan.

    Step 1. Add Ingredients to Saucepan. Add water, brown sugar, pumpkin purée and pumpkin pie spice to a small saucepan.

    Pumpkin spice syrup in saucepan.

    Step 2. Simmer. Bring to a simmer over medium heat. Lower the heat to medium-low and simmer for 8 minutes, whisking occasionally. Remove from heat and let cool.

    Pumpkin spice syrup straining through nut milk bag into bowl.

    Step 3. Strain. Strain the syrup through cheesecloth or a nut milk bag to remove the pulp/spices and make it clear.

    Pumpkin spice syrup in a small decorative jar.

    Step 4. Ready to Use. You can use homemade pumpkin spice coffee syrup in your coffee, lattes, other beverages or even over desserts and breakfast dishes, to taste.

    Pro Tip: To make a thicker syrup, you would simply simmer the mixture for longer until it is reduced to your liking. Keep in mind that it will thicken slightly as it cools.

    🥞 Other Uses Besides Coffee & Lattes

    This syrup is not just for coffee; it can be used as a flavoring for various baked goods and other drinks.

    • The most classic way is to top your pancakes with it; perhaps you can make some pumpkin pancakes to add more pumpkin flavor. I recommend waffles because their pockets will keep the syrup inside and will soak into the waffles without getting soggy. Or, try drizzling it over my pancake batter bread.
    • It is also useful as a simple syrup for cakes and cocktails. Between each layer of cake, soak them in the syrup; this will keep your cakes moist and the pumpkin pie spice will spice up your cakes with delicious fall flavor.
    • If you want a healthier alternative, add it to a bowl of pumpkin spice oatmeal or yogurt for sweetening. The oatmeal and spices will keep you warm and cozy on a cool fall day.

    ❓ Recipe FAQs

    How long does pumpkin spice syrup last in the fridge?

    Because this is a homemade, fresh batch of syrup, it should be stored in a covered container like a jar or squeeze bottle in the fridge for up to two weeks. This gives you plenty of time to spice up your mornings with this autumn flavor favorite.

    How many pumps of pumpkin spice syrup?

    It will depend on the cup size and it is customizable to your taste. In a grande, for example, there are typically 4 pumps of pumpkin sauce.

    Pumpkin spice syrup pouring into a clear, glass mug of coffee.

    🤎 More Homemade Condiments to Enjoy

    • Orgeat almond syrup in jar.
      Homemade Orgeat (Almond Syrup)
    • Pumpkin spice coffee creamer pouring into glass mug of coffee.
      Homemade Pumpkin Spice Coffee Creamer
    • Grenadine syrup pouring from spoon into small glass jar.
      Homemade Grenadine Syrup
    • Gingerbread latte and gingerbread coffee syrup.
      Gingerbread Coffee Syrup (+ Latte)

    If you tried this 🤎☕ Homemade Pumpkin Spice Coffee Syrup Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Pumpkin spice syrup in bottle with pumpkin pie spices in a spoon.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Homemade Pumpkin Spice Coffee Syrup

    Sweeten your coffee, lattes and other drinks with this homemade pumpkin spice coffee syrup. The best part is, this DIY simple syrup can be used in other treats to give everything a fall theme and warm, spiced flavor.
    Course Condiment
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegan, Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 8 minutes minutes
    Total Time 13 minutes minutes
    Servings 32 tablespoons
    Calories 56kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • cheesecloth

    Ingredients

    • 2 cups water
    • 2 cups brown sugar
    • ¼ cup pumpkin purée
    • 2 tablespoons pumpkin pie spice
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Add water, brown sugar, pumpkin purée and pumpkin pie spice to a small saucepan.
    • Bring to a simmer over medium heat. Lower the heat to medium-low and simmer for 8 minutes, whisking occasionally. Remove from heat and let cool.
    • Strain the syrup through cheesecloth or a nut milk bag to remove the pulp/spices and make it clear.
    • You can use it in your coffee, lattes, other hot beverages or even with desserts and breakfast dishes (like pancakes), to taste.

    Notes

    • This recipe yields about 2 cups syrup.
    • This syrup will be thin. If you would like a thicker syrup, simmer it for longer to reduce it. Note that the yield will be less and the flavor will be more concentrated.
    • Your fresh batch of syrup can be stored in a covered container like a jar or squeeze bottle in the fridge for up to two weeks.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 56kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 5mg | Potassium: 28mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 13g | Vitamin A: 300IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 19mg | Iron: 1mg

    Pumpkin Pie Dessert Hummus

    October 4, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    This pumpkin pie hummus features autumn favorites like maple syrup, vanilla, pumpkin spice and real pumpkin purée. This hummus isn't just a snack or appetizer--with the right mix of ingredients, it's a sweet, creamy dessert that captures the rich flavor of pumpkin pie.

    Pumpkin pie hummus in a black bowl with toasted coconut flake topping, breadsticks on the side.

    Typically you would serve hummus in savory form, like in this lemon basil hummus or the classic garlic hummus but this version is more suitable for the dessert table. It basically tastes like pumpkin pie filling!

    Break up a few waffle cones on the side for dipping; they will replicate the flavor and texture of a flaky pie crust.

    It's quick, make-ahead friendly and a healthier dessert hack perfect for Thanksgiving or a fall school snack idea.

    For more delicious fall food ideas, you can check out my post on how to roast butternut squash seeds or my recipes for mini apple pies with puff pastry and no churn pumpkin ice cream.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Pumpkin pie hummus ingredients labeled.
    • canned chickpeas - drained and rinsed really well
    • pumpkin pie spice - check out how to make your own pumpkin pie spice--only 4 spices required
    • maple syrup - this is an excellent way to add sweetness without adding white sugar
    • tahini - optional--it makes the consistency of the hummus more smooth
    • pure pumpkin purée - without added sugar and spices
    • waffle cones - broken into chip-size pieces (to scoop up the hummus) or you can just use your favorite sweet biscuits

    *Check recipe card for full ingredient amounts.

    Recipe Tweaks

    • Consistency: If you would like the pumpkin pie hummus to be thinner, add a little more heavy cream. You can add up to 1 more tablespoon of tahini for more smoothness.
    • Sweetness: You can adjust the sweetness by adding more or less maple syrup.
    • Gluten free: The hummus itself is gluten-free but for some gluten-free dipping options try fruit slices, dried fruit "chips", GF biscuits and crackers, rice cakes, etc.

    How to Make Pumpkin Pie Dessert Hummus

    Chickpeas tossed with pumpkin pie spices in a bowl.

    Step 1. Toss chickpeas. Toss the chickpeas with the pumpkin pie spice and cinnamon.

    Pumpkin pie hummus ingredients in food processor.

    Step 2. Add to processor. Add the hummus ingredients to a food processor or blender.

    Pumpkin pie hummus blended in food processor.

    Step 3. Pulse. Pulse/blend until smooth.

    Chef's Note: You will need to scrape down the sides with a spatula a few times, as it is a thick mixture.

    Pumpkin pie hummus in a bowl with toasted coconut flake topping, breadsticks on the side.

    Step 4. Serve. Serve the pumpkin pie hummus in a small bowl, garnished with coconut flakes.

    What to Serve With Pumpkin Pie Hummus

    • In this pumpkin pie dessert hummus recipe, I suggest waffle cones for dipping, but you can dip your hummus with just about any dipper. This includes crackers, chips, fruit, grilled toast points, mini breadsticks, pretzels and crusty bread.
    • Pair your hummus with a platter of fresh fruit or fall fruit salad to bring out the sweetness of the dessert and take it up a notch.
    • You could also use cookies for a particularly sweet treat.
    • Some people eat sweet hummus with a spoon (like I do with Nutella), although a dipping vehicle adds more texture to the creaminess of the hummus.
    • You could pair your pumpkin hummus with chocolate hummus or homemade chocolate gravy at the table to let your guests choose their dessert or mix the flavors together on one waffle cone chip.
    • Serve your hummus with an apple cider, toasted marshmallow latte or pumpkin pie punch to bring out the autumn flavors in this fall dessert.

    ⭐ For a naughtier version of pumpkin dip, you could try this pumpkin fluff dip! Or, try another new and unique pumpkin dessert like my transparent pie.

    Recipe FAQs

    How long can you leave pumpkin pie hummus out?

    The max amount it can be left out at room temperature is 2 hours.

    Can you make it ahead of time?

    Yes! Once you've made your pumpkin pie hummus, store it in the fridge until you're ready to serve.

    How long does dessert hummus last in the fridge?

    This recipe contains dairy products that can spoil quickly, so refrigerate it in a sealed container. For maximum freshness, eat the hummus within 3-4 days or less.

    Why is my pumpkin pie hummus grainy?

    The hummus might need a little extra blending time or the chickpeas could need softening. Before making the hummus, you could cook the chickpeas in hot water for 5 to 10 minutes which will soften them further. With a high speed food processor you don't normally run into this issue.

    Pumpkin pie hummus in a black bowl on wooden plate with toasted coconut flake topping, breadsticks and small spatula on the side.

    More Seasonal Treats to Try This Fall

    • Oven baked pumpkin spice oatmeal in baking dish.
      Pumpkin Pie Spice Baked Oatmeal
    • Apple crisp in white dish.
      How to Make Apple Crisp
    • Pumpkin spice syrup in bottle with pumpkin pie spices in a spoon.
      Homemade Pumpkin Spice Coffee Syrup
    • Pumpkin muffins with cranberries and oats.
      Pumpkin Spice Oatmeal Muffins

    What's your favorite dipper for dessert hummus? If you tried this Pumpkin Pie Hummus Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Pumpkin pie dessert hummus in black bowl with sweet biscuits on the side.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Pumpkin Pie Dessert Hummus

    This pumpkin pie hummus features autumn favorites like maple syrup, vanilla, pumpkin spice and real pumpkin purée. This hummus isn't just a snack or appetizer--with the right mix of ingredients, it's a sweet, creamy dessert that captures the rich flavor of pumpkin pie.
    Course Dessert, Snack
    Cuisine American
    Diet Low Salt, Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Total Time 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 ¼ cup servings
    Calories 113kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Food processor or blender

    Ingredients

    • 1 cup canned chickpeas drained and rinsed really well
    • 2 ½ teaspoons pumpkin pie spice
    • ½ teaspoon cinnamon
    • 6 tablespoons heavy cream
    • ¼ cup maple syrup
    • 1 ½ teaspoons vanilla
    • 1 tablespoon tahini optional
    • 1 cup pure pumpkin purée
    • toasted coconut flakes to garnish
    • waffle cones broken into chip-size pieces
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Toss the chickpeas with the pumpkin pie spice and cinnamon.
      1 cup canned chickpeas, 2 ½ teaspoons pumpkin pie spice, ½ teaspoon cinnamon
    • Add the heavy cream, maple syrup, vanilla, tahini, pumpkin purée and chickpea/spice mixture to a food processor or blender (in that order).
      6 tablespoons heavy cream, ¼ cup maple syrup, 1 ½ teaspoons vanilla, 1 tablespoon tahini, 1 cup pure pumpkin purée
    • Pulse/blend until smooth. You will need to scrape down the sides with a spatula a few times, as it is a thick mixture.
    • Serve in a small bowl, garnished with coconut flakes. Serve with waffle cone chips for dipping.

    Notes

    • Makes about 2 cups hummus.
    • Optional: Before making the hummus, you could cook the chickpeas in hot water for 5 to 10 minutes which will soften them further. 
    • Once you've made your pumpkin pie hummus, store it in the fridge until you're ready to serve. The max amount of time it can be left out at room temperature is 2 hours.
    • Refrigerate the leftovers in a sealed container afterward. This recipe also contains dairy products that can spoil quickly. For maximum freshness, eat the hummus within 3 to 4 days.
    • If you would like it to be thinner, add a little more heavy cream.
    • You can add up to 1 more tablespoon of tahini for more smoothness.
    • You can adjust the sweetness by adding more or less maple syrup.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 113kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 15mg | Sodium: 65mg | Potassium: 145mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 4938IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 50mg | Iron: 1mg

    Toast Points with Topping Ideas

    September 29, 2021 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    Toast points are one of the most versatile appetizers. You can serve them with any type of dip, make mini sandwiches or add your favorite toppings. They're also quick and easy to prepare, making them great for last-minute parties.

    Toast points with cream cheese and black olive toppings.

    Once you know how to make toast points, you can customize them with different spices and experiment with various types of bread. I also have a ton of topping ideas for you. All you need is bread, a knife, an oven and a few spices--after that, it's up to you.

    Besides a snack or appetizer, they are also perfect for serving alongside a bowl of soup such as this savory mango soup or peanut butter soup.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What are Toast Points?

    So what are toast points, anyway? They're small triangles of toast that you can pair with just about anything. The crispy crunch, browned edges and dusting of spices make them fancier than basic slices of bread.

    Best of all, you don't actually need fancy bread to make these appetizers at home. All you need is a loaf of white bread from the store.

    Ingredients

    Toast point ingredients labeled on orange tile background.
    • good quality white bread - if you want something more elaborate, you could bake bread at home or choose a different type of bread, like rye or sourdough. Each bread has a different taste, crunch and texture that goes well with different dips and toppings.
    • salted butter - Melted--to butter the toast and help the pepper/spices to stick.
    • spices - Black pepper, Italian herbs, paprika, garlic powder. Feel free to customize.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Toast Point Topping Ideas

    Here is where you can get creative or go with some basic spreads! Here is a list of my topping ideas and combinations to get you started:

    • basil pesto hummus
    • classic hummus
    • fruit preserves
    • caviar spread
    • olive tapenade
    • antipasto spread
    • pâté
    • roasted red peppers
    • ricotta cheese
    • goat cheese
    • egg salad
    • ham salad
    • tuna salad
    • chocolate hazelnut spread
    • yeast extract spread
    • caramelized or grilled onions
    • peanut butter and jelly
    • salmon mousse
    • cream cheese with herbs
    • smoked salmon with cream cheese and fresh dill
    • cream cheese with sliced olives
    • goat cheese with nuts and honey
    • fig jam with gorgonzola and prosciutto
    • guacamole with shrimp
    • pesto and Parmesan
    • cream cheese, chopped, sun-dried tomatoes and minced garlic
    • dill pickle cream cheese spread
    • savory whipped cream
    • blue cheese and chopped pears
    • crumbled bacon and maple syrup
    • marshmallow fluff with chocolate sprinkles and crushed graham wafers
    • smashed roasted garlic cloves

    How to Make Toast Points

    Slices of bread on cutting board with the edges cut off.

    Step #1. Remove crust. Preheat oven to 400°F. Remove the outer crust from the bread slices.

    Slices of bread on cutting board with spices.

    Step #2. Season. Lightly brush one side of each piece of bread with the melted butter and sprinkle with pepper and spices.

    Chef's Note: I find a serrated knife works best for cutting the toast into triangles.

    Toast triangles with spices on baking sheet.

    Step #3. Cut into triangles. Cut each slice of bread into 4 triangles and place them on a baking sheet, butter side up.

    Toast points on serving board with bowl of hummus and cream cheese topping.

    Step #4. Bake and serve. Bake for about 6 minutes, until golden and toasted. Cool the toast triangles. Serve immediately with dips and/or different topping combinations.

    Chef's Note: The time it takes to bake can depend on how thick your bread is.

    Serving Ideas

    • Once you've made your points, present them in a way that looks appetizing. Arrange them on a plate with a bowl of dip in the middle, or stack them in various ways around the edge of the bowl.
    • Serve them with caviar for an exquisite treat.
    • If you have a filling like egg salad, use the toast to make sandwiches and stick a toothpick in the middle.
    • For open-faced appetizers, choose colorful ingredients like fruit, dip, herbs or smoked salmon, then arrange them artistically on the bread.
    • Some people even serve toast points alongside entrées so their guests can soak up the sauces, soups or glazes.
    Toast points on serving board with bowl of hummus.

    Related Dips and Spreads to Consider

    • Pumpkin pie dessert hummus in black bowl with sweet biscuits on the side.
      Pumpkin Pie Dessert Hummus
    • Kimchi cream cheese spread in a small black bowl, surrounded by tortilla chips.
      Kimchi Cream Cheese Spread
    • Buffalo chicken dip with green onions in serving dish.
      Easy Slow Cooker Buffalo Chicken Dip
    • Bison cheeseburger dip in a cast iron pan.
      Bison Cheeseburger Dip

    If you tried this 🍞 Toast Points Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Toast points on serving tray with dip.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Toast Points with Topping Ideas

    Once you know how to make these easy toast points, you can customize them with different spices and toppings and experiment with various types of bread. Besides a snack or appetizer, they are also perfect for serving alongside a bowl of soup.
    Course Appetizer, Side Dish, Snack
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 4 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 6 minutes minutes
    Total Time 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 16 toast points
    Calories 23kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    • 4 slices good quality white bread
    • 1 tablespoon salted butter melted
    • black pepper
    • optional spices Italian Herbs, paprika, garlic powder, etc.
    • various toppings or dips to serve
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 400°F. Remove the outer crust from the bread slices using a serrated knife.
      4 slices good quality white bread
    • Lightly brush one side of each piece of bread with the melted butter. Sprinkle with some black pepper and optional spices, if desired.
      1 tablespoon salted butter
    • Cut each slice of bread into 4 triangles. Place the triangles onto a baking sheet, butter side up.
    • Bake for about 6 minutes in the preheated oven, or until golden and toasted. The time it takes can depend on how thick your bread is.
    • Cool the toast triangles on a baking rack.
    • Serve immediately with dips and/or different topping combinations (see notes).

    Notes

    Tip: For best results, pick the most square-shaped bread you can find to form nice, consistent triangles without having to trim too much off. You can trim the outer edges of rectangular or oval-shaped bread, but there's a little more waste. I prefer thinner bread over thick, for it's less chunky, crispy bite.
    Topping Ideas:
    • Hummus, fruit preserves, caviar spread, smoked salmon with cream cheese and fresh dill, pâté, roasted red peppers, ricotta, goat cheese, egg salad, ham salad, salmon mousse, etc.
    • You can use toast points as a dipper for your chowder and other soups.
    • You can use your favorite kind of cream cheese as a base for toppings like olives, nuts, fresh herbs, honey, etc. There are so many variations to try!

    Nutrition

    Calories: 23kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 2mg | Sodium: 37mg | Potassium: 7mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 23IU | Calcium: 16mg | Iron: 1mg

    Triple Meat Sub Sandwich

    September 22, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 2 Comments

    While ordering take-out for the family is easy, nothing beats a homemade meal that everyone can enjoy. Filled with meat like bologna, ham and salami, this triple meat sub sandwich will keep you and your family or other guests full and satisfied.

    Triple meat sub sandwich with sriracha sauce on wooden cutting board and deli paper.

    Sub sandwiches are memory food for me. Back in high school, they were the highlight of one of my favorite hangouts, where I always ordered the same thing: a footlong Cold Cut Trio.

    Honey mustard was my go-to for subs. But now, I'm all about the heat, so I came up with a bold and spicy sub sauce for my redo of the sub.

    The creamy sriracha adds a spicy kick. Crisp lettuce and juicy tomatoes are layered between the meats, giving a satisfying crunch with every bite. The soft, freshly baked bread holds all the ingredients together perfectly.

    Ideal for lunch or a quick dinner, this homemade sub sandwich is sure to please any meat lover. You might also enjoy meat filled sandwiches like the Reuben sandwich, the blackened chicken sandwich, and Puerto Rican tripleta sandwich.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What is a Sub Sandwich?

    A sub is short for submarine sandwich because it is shaped like a submarine. It consists of a long loaf of bread and is filled with various meats, cheeses, vegetables, and condiments.

    Ingredients

    Sub sandwich ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • 12" submarine bun - You can use white, whole wheat or Parmesan & herbs (my favorite) if it's available to you.
    • meat slices - Deli ham, salami and bologna.
    • Swiss cheese slices - You can find pre-sliced Swiss in the deli area of the grocery store. Feel free to substitute with another cheese if you don't like Swiss. There are other options like Havarti, cheddar and Monterey Jack.
    • vegetable toppings - Shredded lettuce, tomato and red onion. You can use a mandolin to slice the vegetables thinly.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Tweaks

    If this sub sandwich recipe is for kids, and they cannot handle spice or strong flavors, that is not a problem. One of the best things about sandwiches is the ease of tweaking the ingredients for those picky eaters.

    • It can be easily fixed by taking out certain ingredients for them, or swapping them for ones they love (like adding regular mayo or mustard instead of spicy mayo).
    • On the other hand, if you like the heat, you can also try this homemade chipotle sauce.
    • As for other mayo substitutes, you can get more creative; to have the same creaminess and density, you can mash some avocado for a vegan option.
    • For the same tartness, go with Greek yogurt.
    • If you want it to be oil-based, add pesto sauce or Italian dressing.

    How to Make a Sub Sandwich

    Sriracha mayo in bowl with whisk.

    Step 1. Make the sub sauce. In a small bowl, mix the mayonnaise with the Sriracha sauce.

    Sub bun sliced in half and opened up with small green knife.

    Step 2. Slice the bread. Slice the bread loaf in half. Careful not to apply too much pressure or the bread will lose its fluffiness.

    Sub bun getting sliced with hinge cut on cutting board.

    Chef's Note: If you want to try the hinge cut, cut the bread at a 45 degree angle instead of a straight, horizontal cut across. This helps the fillings to sit nicely in the bread.

    Triple meat sub sandwich with sriracha sauce, open and cut in half.

    Step 3. Assemble the sandwich. Layer the bottom half of the bread with the ham, bologna, salami, cheese, tomatoes, red onions and lettuce. Drizzle with some creamy sriracha sauce, or desired condiments.

    Cold cut trio sub sandwich.

    Step 4. Serve. Top with remaining bread half. Cut in half to make 2 sandwiches. Serve the sub sandwich!

    Chef's Note: If you are feeding a crowd: make a party platter of subs. Make multiple sandwiches and then cut them each into 3" portions.

    Storage Tips

    • Room temp. Cold cut sandwiches should not be left out at room temperature for more than 2 hours.
    • Fridge storage. The assembled sandwich should last in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 days depending on how fresh your ingredients were. Keep an eye on all of the ingredients.
    • Hold off on condiments. If you do plan on making the sandwich ahead of time and storing it, I would hold off on the condiments so that they don't make the bread or lettuce soggy. It's best to put moist ingredients like tomatoes in between the meat and cheese so that they aren't touching the bread or store them separately until you're ready to serve.
    • Cover it well. Store it in a zip-top bag, plastic wrap or covered container. You want to keep it covered well so that the bread doesn't dry out as quickly.
    • The sauce. The remaining sriracha sauce can be refrigerated in a squeeze bottle or air-tight container for up to two weeks.

    💬 Hungry for more? Try my Toast Points with delicious topping ideas! If you've roasted your own ham for this recipe, try making a ham gravy with the drippings to avoid any food waste.

    Sub Sandwich FAQs

    What are the origins of the sub sandwich?

    The origin theory of this sandwich comes out of New London, Connecticut which is actually across the Thames river from a submarine base for the US Navy (in Groton). It was theorized to be introduced by Benedetto Capaldo.

    At first, it was called a 'grinder' because of the chewy Italian bread, but the name 'sub' replaced it around World War II. It is loved today for its size, portability, and simple deliciousness.

    What are some other names for the sub sandwich?

    Depending on who you ask and where they're from, it can also be called a hoagie, spuckie, wedge, hero, grinder or Italian.

    What is the best way to layer a sub sandwich?

    To recreate the mouthwatering look of Subway subs from their photos, start by layering the vegetables first, followed by the meat, then the cheese and finish with your favorite condiments. For that final touch of flavor, add a sprinkle of salt and pepper.

    In the restaurant, however, the meat and cheese comes first, then the vegetables. You can try it both ways and see what works best for you.

    Triple meat sub sandwich with sriracha sauce, cut in half.

    Related Sides to Consider

    • Kimchi and crab slaw in bowl with green onions and black sesame seeds.
      Kimchi Slaw
    • Watermelon salad with basil in black salad bowl.
      Watermelon Basil Salad
    • Homemade roasted garlic tomato soup in white soup bowl.
      Homemade Roasted Garlic Tomato Soup
    • Cajun French fries in basket.
      How to Make Cajun Fries

    If you tried this Triple Meat Sub Sandwich Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Triple meat sub sandwich on parchment lined cutting board.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Triple Meat Sub Sandwich

    Filled with meat like bologna, ham and salami, this triple meat sub sandwich is hearty and delicious. The creamy sriracha sub sauce adds a spicy kick. Crisp lettuce and juicy tomatoes are layered between the meats, giving a satisfying crunch with every bite.
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 2
    Calories 695kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    For the Sub Sandwich

    • 1 submarine bun 12"
    • 4 slices deli ham
    • 4 slices bologna
    • 8 slices salami
    • 4 slices Swiss cheese
    • 1 medium tomato thinly sliced
    • ½ small red onion thinly sliced
    • 1 cup shredded lettuce

    For the Creamy Sriracha Sub Sauce

    • ½ cup mayonnaise
    • 1 ½ tablespoons sriracha sauce
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • In a small bowl, mix the mayonnaise with the Sriracha sauce. Reserve.
    • Slice the bread loaf in half. Careful not to apply too much pressure or the bread will lose its fluffiness.
    • Layer the bottom half of the bread with the ham, bologna, salami, cheese, tomatoes, red onions and lettuce.
    • Drizzle with some creamy sriracha sauce, or desired condiments. Top with remaining bread half.
    • Cut in half to make 2 sandwiches. Serve!

    Notes

    • Sub sauce storage: The remaining sriracha sauce can be refrigerated in a squeeze bottle or air-tight container for up to two weeks.
    • Food safety: Cold cut sandwiches should not be left out at room temperature for more than 2 hours.
    • Fridge storage: The assembled sandwich should last in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 days depending on how fresh your ingredients were. Keep an eye on all of the ingredients. If you do plan on making the sandwich ahead of time and storing it, I would hold off on the condiments so that they don't make the bread or lettuce soggy. It's best to put moist ingredients like tomatoes in between the meat and cheese so that they aren't touching the bread.
    • Storage tip: Store it in a zip-top bag, plastic wrap or covered container. You want to keep it covered well so that the bread doesn't dry out as quickly.
    • Party platter: If you are feeding a crowd, make a party platter of subs. Make multiple sandwiches and then cut them each into 3" portions. That's the perfect size for young kids too.
    • Sauce substitution: If this sandwich recipe is for kids, I recommend serving a honey-mustard instead of sriracha mayo because it isn't spicy and the touch of sweetness and tang complements the sandwich well.
    • Cutting the sub bun: If you want to try the hinge cut, cut the bread at a 45 degree angle instead of a straight, horizontal cut across. This helps the fillings to sit nicely in the bread.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 695kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 42g | Fat: 46g | Saturated Fat: 19g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 19g | Cholesterol: 128mg | Sodium: 2235mg | Potassium: 725mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 1023IU | Vitamin C: 11mg | Calcium: 346mg | Iron: 7mg

    Delicious Kimchi Ramen

    September 20, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    Korean Kimchi ramen is a great recipe if you want to elevate your ramen with spicy, sweet and savory flavors while still enjoying the nostalgic noodles. The marinated pork adds plenty of salty, meaty flavor while the kimchi and ginger give the soup a nice kick.

    Kimchi ramen with pork slices and chopsticks in a bowl.

    I have been experimenting with tweaking classic recipes with kimchi and the results are great. My family and I love to enjoy a bowl of this delicious, hot and cozy soup on a cool day.

    Ramen is all the rage right now, even among younger kids, according to my daugher! It likely has something to do with the K-pop craze (it's taken over our house too).

    The familiar, thin noodles will take next to no time to cook and kimchi adds cozy, umami flavor and a nice level of spice to ramen noodle soup.

    Trust me, this recipe tastes soo much better than just heating up a package of noodles and calling it a day. Plus, you can make a big batch and heat it up over the next few days.

    Another popular noodle dish I add kimchi to is this kimchi udon noodle stir fry.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What is Kimchi Ramen?

    Many people know ramen as a cheap, packaged or cup of noodles and broth. By adding marinated pork tenderloin, kimchi, and other spices, packaged ramen can turn into a filling main dish...or in this case ramen soup - aka. Kimchi Ramen.

    The star of the dish, Korean kimchi, is spicy fermented cabbage, specifically napa cabbage. It can be eaten alone or added into other dishes, like:

    • Korean scrambled egg breakfast
    • kimchi mac and cheese
    • Korean burgers

    Ingredients

    Kimchi ramen soup ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • pork tenderloin - Choose a pork tenderloin with a nice pinkish-red color; there will be minimal marbling due to the leanness of this cut. Avoid tenderloins that are dull in color. Be sure to trim any silverskin off (a shiny membrane) with a sharp, thin knife.
    • kimchi - It's easy to find authentic kimchi at the supermarket but you can also make this daikon kimchi at home.
    • Chinese 5 spice powder - This is a blend of cloves, star anise, cinnamon, fennel seeds and Sichuan peppercorns.
    • chicken-flavored instant noodles - This recipe uses single serving instant noodle packages for an easy version of kimchi ramen soup. You can make the chicken broth with the powder packets that come with the noodles.

    *Check recipe card for full ingredient amounts.

    Recipe Tweaks

    • More vegetables: Other than the kimchi, I recommend baby spinach or kale because of their vitamins and minerals and they will mix well into the soup.
    • Soup cracker alternative: I have a tutorial for how to make crispy kale chips; they could be served on the side of your soup in place of crackers.
    • Ramen egg: This is one of my favorite things to add! It is a soft-boiled egg soaked in a soy sauce mixture overnight. It adds an extra salty but creamy flavor to the dish with the marinade and soft egg yolk.

    How to Make Kimchi Ramen

    A ziptop bag with pork tenderloin and marinade.

    Step 1. Marinate the pork. Place the pork tenderloin in a plastic bag with the Chinese 5 spice, ginger, garlic, soy sauce and sesame oil. Seal the bag, massage it to coat the pork and marinate for 30 minutes in the fridge.

    Seared pork tenderloin in a large pot.

    Step 2. Sear the pork. Remove the pork from the marinade. Season it with some salt and pepper. Heat a large heavy pot to medium-high heat, add the canola oil and sear the pork until browned on all sides (about 8-10 minutes). Remove from heat.

    Broth in a jar and a large pot.

    Step 3. Make the broth. Remove the pork and reserve it. Drain the oil from the pot. In the pot, combine the water with the 2 flavor packets that came with the instant noodles. Return to the stove over medium-high heat.

    Broth with pork tenderloin in a large pot.

    Step 4. Simmer. Bring the broth to a boil and then lower heat to a simmer, scraping the browned bits at the bottom so that they loosen. Return the pork to the pot and simmer for 10-15 minutes, until the internal temperature of the pork reaches 145°F.

    👩🏻‍🍳 Chef's Note: Keeping the browned cooked-on bits in the pot will add flavor to your kimchi soup.

    Kimchi ramen broth straining through a fine mesh strainer.

    Step 5. Strain broth. Remove the pork from the broth to a cutting board. Strain the broth through a fine mesh strainer. Return the broth to the pot.

    Instant ramen noodles in a pot with tongs.

    Step 6. Cook the noodles. Bring the broth to a boil, add the noodles and cook for 3 minutes.

    Instant ramen noodles in a pot.

    Chef's Note: Instant noodles don't take long to cook and can become mushy so keep an eye on them.

    Pork being sliced on a cutting board.

    Step 7. Slice the pork. While the noodles are cooking, slice the pork into thin slices.

    Kimchi ramen with pork slices and chopsticks in a bowl.

    Step 8. Serve the kimchi ramen. Serve in bowls with the pork slices and kimchi, divided evenly. Top with the green onions, fresh cilantro and Sriracha sauce if you like a little more kick.

    Joss' Helpful Tips

    • Prep. Prep the toppings ahead of time and store separately in covered containers in the fridge.
    • Stir the noodles. While the noodles are cooking, give them a quick stir so that they don't clump together.
    • Consume the soup with the Japanese technique. To savor ramen the Japanese way, begin by bringing the bowl up close. Take a few sips of the broth, then slurp the noodles swiftly, aiming for a finish within 5 minutes, without any interruptions. Slurping the soup will cool the noodles and intensify the flavor.

    Kimchi Ramen FAQs

    How long can you store leftover kimchi ramen?

    Leftover soup should be covered and stored in the fridge for up to 3 days. Reheat on the stove.

    Are kimchi ramen noodles spicy?

    The kimchi noodles are tasty, not too sour or too spicy, with just the right amount of heat.

    Can you freeze the leftover soup?

    You can, but the noodles might end up mushy when reheated. I would recommend removing the noodles from the soup before freezing. When you reheat it, you can use a fresh pack of ramen. Make sure to cool the soup first, use airtight containers and freeze for up to 3 months.

    Can you make this kimchi ramen vegan?

    You can with a few tweaks: Make sure your kimchi is vegan for starters. Omit the pork (consider tofu instead). Use a vegetable broth instead of chicken.

    Kimchi ramen with pork slices and chopsticks in a bowl.

    Related Side Dishes to Consider

    • Kimchi grilled cheese sandwiches stacked on serving tray with skewer.
      Kimchi Grilled Cheese Sandwiches
    • Kimchi bacon fried rice on a plate on brown background.
      Kimchi Bacon Fried Rice
    • Fried tofu on serving plate.
      How to Fry Tofu
    • Kimchi dumplings arranged on plate with dipping sauce.
      Kimchi Dumplings

    If you tried this Kimchi Ramen Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Kimchi ramen noodle soup in bowl with wooden chopsticks.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Delicious Kimchi Ramen

    This delicious kimchi ramen is a great recipe if you want to elevate your ramen noodle soup with spicy, sweet and savory flavors. The kimchi gives this soup a nice kick!
    Course Main Course, Soup
    Cuisine Japanese, Korean
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 20 minutes minutes
    Marinating Time 30 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour
    Servings 4
    Calories 344kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    • ½ pound pork tenderloin
    • 1 tablespoon Chinese 5 spice powder
    • 1 tablespoon fresh ginger grated
    • 1 tablespoon garlic minced
    • 2 tablespoons soy sauce
    • 3 tablespoons sesame oil
    • 1 tablespoon canola oil
    • 5 cups water
    • 2 chicken-flavored instant noodles the single serve packages
    • ½ cup kimchi
    • green onions sliced (to garnish)
    • fresh cilantro leaves to garnish
    • sriracha sauce optional
    • salt and pepper
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Place the pork tenderloin in a plastic bag with the Chinese 5 spice, ginger, garlic, soy sauce and sesame oil. Seal the bag, massage it to coat the pork and marinate for 30 minutes in the fridge.
      ½ pound pork tenderloin, 1 tablespoon Chinese 5 spice powder, 1 tablespoon fresh ginger, 1 tablespoon garlic, 2 tablespoons soy sauce, 3 tablespoons sesame oil
      A ziptop bag with pork tenderloin and marinade.
    • Remove the pork from the marinade. Season it with some salt and pepper.
      Marinated pork tenderloin and a large pot.
    • Heat a large heavy pot to medium-high heat, add the canola oil and sear the pork until browned on all sides (about 8-10 minutes). Remove from heat.
      1 tablespoon canola oil
      Seared pork tenderloin in a large pot.
    • Remove the pork and reserve it. Drain the oil from the pot. Keeping the browned cooked-on bits in the pot will add flavor to your soup.
      Seared pork tenderloin in a large pot.
    • In the pot, combine the water with the 2 flavor packets that came with the instant noodles. Return to the stove over medium-high heat.
      5 cups water
      Broth in a jar and a large pot.
    • Bring the broth to a boil and then lower heat to a simmer, scraping the browned bits at the bottom so that they loosen. Return the pork to the pot and simmer for 10-15 minutes, until the internal temperature of the pork reaches 145°F.
      Broth with pork tenderloin in a large pot.
    • Remove the pork from the broth to a cutting board. Strain the broth through a fine mesh strainer. Return the broth to the pot.
      Kimchi ramen broth straining through a fine mesh strainer.
    • Bring the broth to a boil, add the noodles and cook for 3 minutes.
      2 chicken-flavored instant noodles
      Instant ramen noodles in a pot with tongs.
    • While the noodles are cooking, slice the pork.
      Pork being sliced on a cutting board.
    • Serve in bowls with the pork slices and kimchi, divided evenly. Top with the green onions, fresh cilantro and Sriracha sauce if you like a little more kick.
      ½ cup kimchi
      Kimchi ramen with pork slices and chopsticks in a bowl.

    Notes

    • Vegetable tweak: If you wish to add more vegetables other than the kimchi, I recommend baby spinach or kale because of their vitamins and minerals and they will mix well into the soup.
    • Fridge storage: Leftover soup should be covered and stored in the fridge for up to 3 days. Reheat on the stove.
    • Freezer storage: I would recommend removing the noodles from the soup before freezing. When you reheat it, you can use a fresh pack of ramen. Make sure to cool the soup first, use airtight containers and freeze for up to 3 months. Thaw in the fridge.
    • Asian technique: To savor ramen the Asian way, begin by bringing the bowl up close. Take a few sips of the broth, then slurp the noodles swiftly, aiming for a finish within 5 minutes, without any interruptions. Slurping the soup will cool the noodles and intensify the flavor.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 344kcal | Carbohydrates: 31g | Protein: 18g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 37mg | Sodium: 1324mg | Potassium: 398mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 18IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 57mg | Iron: 4mg

    Savory Potato Galette

    September 15, 2021 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    If you are craving a savory pie with delicious flavors but simple steps, this savory potato galette recipe will hit the spot. The pesto sauce and Parmesan cheese give the baked thin potatoes a seasoned, savory flavor. The free-form pastry dough wrapped around it holds it all together in a rustic fashion.

    Baked potato galette on parchment, Parmesan cheese on the side.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    ❓ What is a Galette?

    A galette is a French, flat, round pastry topped with thinly sliced ingredients. It is pronounced guh-let and in English means 'flat cake'. The pastry is free-form, as the sides of the pastry are folded slightly over the top of the filling and crimped, to loosely keep the filling in, and is then baked.

    It can be a sweet or savory dish (like this fall savory pumpkin galette), and the most common ingredients are vegetarian like fruits (as in my raspberry fruit galette and sweet cherry galette), vegetables and cheese.

    In this potato galette recipe, the thinly sliced potatoes are arranged and layered into a circle, adding to the rustic qualities of a classic galette. When you bake the potatoes in the oven, they turn out golden and crispy along the edges.

    🥔 Ingredients

    Savory potato galette ingredients labeled.
    • cold butter - Cold butter will result in a tender and flaky pastry.
    • cold water - Not pictured.
    • potatoes - Choose either Yukon Gold or red potatoes. Yukon Gold potatoes have a thin skin so there is no need for peeling but scrub and wash them well. You can also use red potatoes. Red potatoes hold their shape well when roasted and don't need peeling, similar to the yellow Yukon Gold potatoes.
    • basil pesto - You should be able to find a jar of basil pesto in the pasta aisle.
    • Parmesan cheese - Not pictured. Freshly grated is best! That is all I ever use but feel free to use pre-grated if that is what you have on hand.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    📖 Recipe Tweaks

    • You can add a variety of vegetables and/or spices to your potato galette for different flavors and textures. Since pesto is mixed into this recipe, adding some spinach is a good tweak because it is leafy and green like the basil in pesto and it adds some more nutrition to the dish.
    • If you prefer a sun-dried tomato pesto, give that a try.
    • If you are serving this potato galette over the holidays for guests, try baking one with basil pesto and one with tomato pesto for a beautiful red and green contrast on the dinner table.

    🔪 How to Make a Potato Galette

    Flour and butter in a bowl with a fork.

    Step 1: Begin Making the Pastry Dough. In a medium bowl, combine the flour and salt. Add the cubes of butter and cut them into the flour with a fork or your fingers until coarse.

    Galette pastry dough in a bowl, wooden spoon on the side.

    Step 2: Form a Ball. Add the egg and 2 tablespoons cold water and work the mixture together just until it forms a ball (you can add 1 more tablespoon cold water if needed). Flatten into a disc, cover with plastic wrap and chill for 30 minutes.

    Potato getting sliced with a mandolin.

    Step 3: Slice the Potatoes. Preheat oven to 425°F and line a baking sheet or pizza pan with parchment paper. Slice the potatoes with a mandoline to make very thin slices.

    Sliced potatoes and basil pesto in a glass bowl.

    Step 4: Mix Potatoes With Pesto. Mix sliced potatoes in a bowl with pesto sauce. Every slice should be coated with the sauce. Set aside.

    👩‍🍳 Chef's Note: The potatoes can be sliced by hand with a chef's knife if you do not have a mandoline.

    Pastry dough on parchment paper with a rolling pin.

    Step 5: Roll the Dough Out. On a lightly floured surface, roll out the dough into a circle that is approximately 13"-14" in diameter. Transfer to the parchment-lined pan.

    Pastry dough on parchment paper with a rolling pin and some potato slices.

    Step 6: Add the Filling. Layer the potato slices starting from the center of the pastry circle, leaving a 2" border around the edge. Sprinkle with some salt and pepper.

    Rolled out pastry on parchment paper with potato slices in the center.

    Step 7: Fold the Pastry Edges Over the Potatoes. Fold the dough border up around the edges to partially enclose the potato filling. The center will remain open.

    Galette pastry dough on parchment paper with potato slices in the center.

    Step 8: Bake the Potato Galette. Cover with aluminum foil and bake for 25 minutes. Remove the foil and bake for another 15 to 20 minutes or until the crust is golden brown and the potatoes are cooked. Remove from the oven and let it cool a bit.

    Parmesan grated over potato galette on parchment paper.

    Step 9: Serve the Potato Galette! Sprinkle with some freshly grated Parmesan cheese. Slice and serve.

    💭 Joss' Top Tip

    While the steps are easy, always be cautious when using a mandoline to slice potatoes. Here are some tips to help you stay safe using a mandoline:

    1. Make sure the blade is sharp for more control.
    2. Use the mandoline on a flat surface.
    3. Always use the hand guard and inspect it with each use, as well as cut-resistant gloves, if you have a pair.

    🤔 Savory Potato Galette FAQs

    Can you make it ahead of time?

    Yes! It can be baked ahead of time, refrigerated and reheated for up to 3 to 5 days. It can also be served cold.

    How do you store the leftover potato galette?

    Keep the galette refrigerated in an airtight container for up to 3 to 5 days.

    How do you reheat it?

    It can be reheated in the oven at 350°F for 10 to 15 minutes or until it's warmed all the way through.

    How do you keep a potato galette from getting soggy?

    Using yellow potatoes (Yukon Gold) is best as they have less moisture than russets. You can also make sure to layer the slices thinly and let the galette rest for a few minutes before slicing. During the layering step, you can try sprinkling a touch of cornstarch or flour between layers.

    Potato galette sliced in half on parchment paper with Parmesan cheese block on the side.

    🍽 Related Main Dishes to Consider

    • Kimchi ramen noodle soup in bowl with wooden chopsticks.
      Delicious Kimchi Ramen
    • Braised beef with pureed vegetables on white dish.
      How to Braise Beef
    • Grilled bison ribeye steak sliced on cutting board with spices on the side.
      Grilled Bison Ribeye Steaks
    • Blackened chicken breast on plate with lime wedges and cilantro.
      Cajun Blackened Chicken Breast

    If you tried this 🥔 Savory Potato Galette Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Potato galette with basil pesto sliced in half.
    Print Pin
    5 from 3 votes

    Savory Potato Galette

    If you are craving a savory pie with delicious flavors but simple steps, this potato galette smothered in basil pesto will hit the spot.
    Course Appetizer, Snack
    Cuisine French
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 20 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 40 minutes minutes
    Chill Time 30 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour 30 minutes minutes
    Servings 8
    Calories 278kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Rimmed pizza pan
    • Mandoline

    Ingredients

    For the Pastry

    • 1 ⅓ cups all-purpose flour
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ½ cup cold butter cut into cubes
    • 1 egg
    • 2 tablespoons cold water

    For the Filling

    • 2 medium Yukon gold potatoes about 14 ounces/400 grams
    • ½ cup basil pesto
    • Parmesan cheese grated
    • salt and pepper
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • In a medium bowl, combine the flour and salt.
      1 ⅓ cups all-purpose flour, ½ teaspoon salt
      Flour and butter in a bowl.
    • Add the cubes of butter and cut them into the flour with a fork or your fingers until coarse.
      ½ cup cold butter
      Flour and butter in a bowl with a fork.
    • Add the egg and 2 tablespoons cold water and work the mixture together just until it forms a ball (you can add 1 more tablespoon cold water if needed). Flatten into a disc, cover with plastic wrap and chill for 30 minutes.
      Flour and butter in a bowl with an egg.
    • Preheat oven to 425°F and line a baking sheet or pizza pan with parchment paper. Slice the potatoes with a mandoline to make very thin slices.
      2 medium Yukon gold potatoes
      Potato getting sliced with a mandolin.
    • Mix sliced potatoes in a bowl with pesto sauce. Every slice should be coated with the sauce. Set aside.
      ½ cup basil pesto
      Sliced potatoes and basil pesto in a glass bowl.
    • On a lightly floured surface, roll out the dough into a circle that is approximately 13"-14" in diameter. Transfer to the parchment-lined pan.
      Pastry dough on parchment paper with a rolling pin.
    • Layer the potato slices starting from the center of the pastry circle, leaving a 2" border around the edge. Sprinkle with some salt and pepper.
      Pastry dough on parchment paper with a rolling pin and some potato slices.
    • Fold the dough border up around the edges to partially enclose the potato filling. The center will remain open.
      Rolled out pastry on parchment paper with potato slices in the center.
    • Cover with aluminum foil and bake for 25 minutes. Remove the foil and bake for another 15 to 20 minutes or until the crust is golden brown and the potatoes are cooked. Remove from the oven and let it cool a bit.
      Galette pastry dough on parchment paper with potato slices in the center.
    • Sprinkle with some freshly grated Parmesan cheese. Slice and serve.
      Baked potato galette with grated Parmesan cheese.

    Notes

    • Keep the galette refrigerated in an airtight container for up to 5 days.
    • It can be reheated in the oven at 350°F for 10 to 15 minutes.
    • Yukon Gold potatoes have a thin skin so there is no need for peeling but scrub and wash them well.
    • You can also use red potatoes. Red potatoes hold their shape well when roasted and don't need peeling, similar to the yellow Yukon Gold potatoes.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 278kcal | Carbohydrates: 25g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 52mg | Sodium: 377mg | Potassium: 212mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 698IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 40mg | Iron: 1mg
    « Previous Page
    Next Page »
    Joss Dyckson author photo.

    Hi, I'm Joss!

    I am the creator and editor of In the Kitch. I am inviting you on this food journey with me to learn, grow and bring out that inner chef in you. I hope to inspire you to get creative in your own kitchen!

    More about me →

    Patriotic Recipes

    • 4th of July themed charcuterie board on red plate with red, white and blue stars.
      4th of July Charcuterie Board
    • Grilled burgers on metal flipper, grill grates in the background.
      How to Grill Frozen Burgers
    • Blueberry mojito mocktail with fresh mint in cocktail glass.
      Blueberry Mojito Mocktail
    • 4th of July pulled pork sliders on parchment lined serving tray.
      4th of July Pulled Pork Sliders
    • Canada Day raspberry cheesecake in jars with red and white spoons.
      Raspberry Cheesecake in a Jar (Canada Day Dessert)
    • Watermelon basil cocktail in wine glass with watermelon swizzle stick.
      Frozen Watermelon Basil Cocktail

    Popular

    • Cake pop frosting in bowl with spatula.
      Cake Pop Frosting & Coating
    • Collage of coffee syrups.
      12 Coffee Syrup Recipes to Upgrade Your Brew
    • Pictures of passion fruit recipes collage.
      16 Easy Passion Fruit Recipes To Make This Summer
    • BBQ buffalo wings in dish with sauce on the side.
      37 Easy and Delicious Electric Skillet Recipes
    • Peanut butter soup in a speckled bowl.
      Peanut Butter Soup
    • Corn tortillas on foil.
      How to Heat Corn Tortillas (3 Ways)

    Footer

    ↑ back to top

    In the Kitch

    • Privacy Policy
    • Terms & Conditions
    • Disclaimer
    • Accessibility Statement

    About

    • About
    • The Team

    Contact

    • Contact

    As an Amazon Associate I earn from qualifying purchases.

    Copyright © 2026 In the Kitch

    Rate This Recipe

    Your vote:




    A rating is required
    A name is required
    An email is required